Sony Switch MKS 2010 User Manual

MMultiFForSmat-S2wit0che0r S0ystemSystem  
(With MKS-2010/MKS-2015/MKS-2017 Control Panel)  
User’s Guide [English]  
1st Edition (Revised 1)  
Software Version 2.00 and Later  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on  
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on  
Systems.................................................47  
Selecting Video in the M/E Cross-Point  
Downstream Key/Fade to Black Control  
Power Indicators, “Memory Stick” Slot, USB  
Selecting Video in the PGM/PST Cross-Point  
Selecting Video in the AUX Bus Control  
Selecting the Transition Type and the Next  
Selecting Effects With the Flexi Pad Control  
Changing the Position and Size of Effect  
Changing Pattern Position and Size With the  
Changing Pattern Size and Position From  
Softening Video Edges (Soft Edge/Soft  
Table of Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Text With a Luminance Key or  
Selecting Input Signals for Frame Memory ....  
Freezing Images and Saving Them to Memory  
Recalling Freeze Images Saved in Frame  
Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a  
Composing a Video border Color From Two  
Saving, Recalling, and Deleting Effect  
Batch Operating on Data Files of Selected  
4
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Operations – Selecting the Frame  
144  
System Adjustments (System Adjust Menu)...  
System Reset and Memory Initialization  
Settings Relating to Video Switching  
Macro Execution Mode Settings (Macro  
External Device Connection Port Setup  
Manual VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR  
Checking VTR, Disk Recorder, and Extended  
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File Operations  
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX  
Setting the Startup Mode (Startup Mode  
Output Signal Assignment (Output Assign  
Assigning Signals to Cross-Point Buttons  
Displaying Version Information (Version  
Displaying Detail Information (Detail  
Manually Installing Software (Manual Install  
Entering an Installation Key (License Menu) .  
Setting the Date and Time (Date/Time Menu)  
Table of Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview  
Chapter  
Introduction  
System Features  
This manual is the User’s Guide for the MFS-2000 Multi  
Format Switcher system.  
The MFS-2000 system is a compact multi-format switcher  
system supporting numerous HD and SD signal formats.  
The principal features of this system are as follows.  
The MFS-2000 system is comprised of the MFS-2000  
Multi Format Switcher Processor, the main unit, and  
optional system devices such as control panels and system  
boards.  
In place of the official device names, this manual refers to  
the devices in the system by the names shown in the  
following table.  
Multi-format support  
Support for the 480i/59.94 and 576i/50 formats is standard.  
The optional BZS-2000M Switcher Upgrade Software can  
be installed to provide support for the following formats.  
• 1080i/50, 59.94  
• 1080PsF/23.976, 24, 25, 29.97  
Official device name  
Name used in this manual  
• 720p/59.94  
MFS-2000 Multi Format  
Switcher Processor  
Switcher or processor  
State of the art special effects  
MKS-2010 1 M/E Control  
Panel  
Control panel or 1 M/E  
panel  
In its standard configuration, the system supports a wide  
variety of effect patterns, including advanced wipes.  
Installation of the optional MKS-2470 DME Board Set  
makes a further array of advanced effects available, such  
as flip tumble, page turn, and 2ch P in P (two-channel  
picture-in-picture).  
MKS-2015 1.5 M/E Control  
Panel  
Control panel or 1.5 M/E  
a)  
panel  
MKS-2017 1.5 M/E Wide  
Control Panel  
Control panel or 1.5 M/E  
a)  
wide panel  
MKS-2470 DME Board Set  
DME or DME option  
Comprehensive keying capabilities  
DCU-8000 Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-8700  
(MKS-8700)  
The system is equipped with two keyers and two  
downstream keyers. All keyers support chroma keying and  
special key transitions, independent of background  
transitions (“independent key transitions”).  
DCU-2000 Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-2700  
(MKS-2700)  
a) The term “1.5 M/E system” refers to systems using either the 1.5 M/E  
panel or the 1.5 M/E wide panel.  
Optimal for use in live broadcast  
environment  
Compact and lightweight  
Both control panels and processor are compact and  
lightweight, designed for use where space is limited. This  
is the optimal system for use in small-scale outdoor  
broadcast vans and editing suites.  
Introduction / System Features  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Outstanding ease of use  
Buttons and other controls on the control panels are  
grouped in easy to understand functional blocks,  
facilitating the quick decisions that must be made in a live  
broadcast environment.  
The menu control block features a 6.5-type color LCD  
touch panel, for quick menu operation.  
Options  
The following options are available for the MFS-2000  
system.  
• MKS-2010 1 M/E Control Panel  
• MKS-2015 1.5 M/E Control Panel  
• MKS-2017 1.5 M/E Wide Control Panel  
• MKS-2110M Input/Output Connector Board  
• MKS-2470 DME Board Set  
Selection of optimal control panel  
Any of the following three control panels can be selected  
for the optimal match to the intended applications and  
working environment.  
• MKS-2010  
• MKS-2440 Frame Memory Board Set  
• MKS-2420M Color Corrector Board  
• BZS-2000M Switcher Upgrade Software  
• BZS-2470M DME Upgrade Software  
• BZS-2440M Frame Memory Upgrade Software  
• HK-PSU02 Power Supply Unit (for MFS-2000)  
• HK-PSU11 Power Supply Unit (for control panels)  
• MKS-2015  
• MKS-2017  
See page 10 for the principal differences between these  
control panels.  
For more information about the above options, refer to the  
MFS-2000-C Operation Manual supplied with the MFS-  
2000 Multi Format Switcher Processor.  
• MKS-2700 Device Control Unit  
• MKS-8700 Device Control Unit  
For more information about the above options, refer to the  
DCU-2000 or DCU-8000 Operation Manual supplied  
with the DCU-2000 or DCU-8000 Device Control Unit  
Pack.  
• MKS-2050 Editing Keyboard  
• MKS-8050 Editing Keyboard  
• BZS-8050 Editing Control Software  
For more information about the above options, refer to the  
MKS-2050/8050 Operation Manual supplied with the  
MKS-2050/8050 Editing Keyboard and the BZS-8050  
User’s Guide.  
• MKS-8080 AUX Bus Remote Panel  
• MKS-8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel  
For more information about the above options, refer to the  
MKS-8080/8082 Operation Guide or Operation Manual  
supplied with the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote  
Panel.  
Note that the MKS-8080/8082 Operation Manual is  
supplied as a PDF file unlike the MKS-8080/8082  
Operation Guide. For more information about the MKS-  
8080/8082 Operation Manual, contact the Sony dealer  
from whom you purchased the MKS-8080/8082.  
8
Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                         
Names and Functions of  
Parts  
Chapter  
Control Panel Types  
In this system, you can use any one of the three control  
panels shown on the following page. This manual refers to  
these control panels by the names shown in parentheses ( )  
in the figure on that page.  
Control Panel Types  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
EFFECT  
MENU  
A
POWER  
B
M/E  
1CH  
M/E  
2CH  
P/P  
MENU  
TOP/  
SHUT  
DOWN  
BVLD  
EDGE  
TRAIL/  
SHDW  
LIGHT  
SOFT  
REV  
REG  
FILE  
BORD  
N/R  
CROP  
POS  
CTR  
SET  
UP  
DIAG  
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFFECT  
EFF/  
WIPE  
MENU  
M/E  
A
POWER  
B
M/E  
1CH  
M/E  
2CH  
MENU  
TOP/  
SHUT  
DOWN  
SAFE  
TITLE  
EDIT  
GPI  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
BVLD  
EDGE  
TRAIL/  
SHDW  
LIGHT  
SOFT  
REV  
REG  
FILE  
1
AUX DELEGATION  
STORE  
MCRO  
BORD  
N/R  
CROP  
POS  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
PGM  
AUTO  
TRNS  
EFF  
DISS  
10  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
CTR  
SET  
UP  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
KEY2  
DSK2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
DIAG  
AUX  
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY  
PRIOR  
BLACK  
OVER OVER  
M/E  
EFF  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
SAFE  
TITLE  
XPT  
HOLD  
EDIT  
GPI  
SNAP  
SHOT  
SHIFT  
ALL  
NEXT TRANSITION  
M/E  
1
PST  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
STORE  
MCRO  
DEVICE/UTILITY  
DEV1 DEV2  
MACRO  
MIX  
EFF  
COLOR  
MIX  
BLACK  
ALL  
STOP  
START  
TC  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
AUTO  
TRNS  
EFF  
DISS  
PLAY  
STOP  
CUE  
SHTL  
JOG  
10  
TRANSITION TYPE  
A
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
AUX DELEGATION  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
TRANS  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
DSK2  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
PGM  
B
KEY1  
KEY2  
FRAMES  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
KEY2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
OVER OVER  
DEVICE/UTILITY  
MACRO  
AUX  
FTB  
FTB  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY  
PRIOR  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
ALL  
STOP  
START  
TC  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
BLACK  
DEV1  
DEV2  
PLAY  
STOP  
CUE  
SHTL  
JOG  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
DSK  
PVW  
XPT  
HOLD  
XPT  
HOLD  
DSK  
PVW  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
NEXT TRANSITION  
PGM/PST  
M/E  
PST  
COLOR  
BKGD  
COLOR  
BKGD  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
BLACK  
M/E  
M/E  
BLACK  
MIX  
EFF  
COLOR  
MIX  
MIX  
WIPE  
PGM  
TRANSITION TYPE  
A
TRANSITION TYPE  
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
BLACK  
BLACK  
TRANS  
TRANS  
PST  
B
FRAMES  
DSK1  
DSK2  
FRAMES  
DSK1  
DSK2  
MKS-2015 Control Panel (1.5 M/E panel)  
MKS-2010 Control Panel (1 M/E panel)  
EFFECT  
MENU  
A
POWER  
B
M/E  
1CH  
M/E  
2CH  
P/P  
MENU  
TOP/  
SHUT  
DOWN  
BVLD  
EDGE  
TRAIL/  
SHDW  
LIGHT  
SOFT  
REV  
REG  
FILE  
BORD  
N/R  
CROP  
POS  
CTR  
SET  
UP  
DIAG  
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF  
/WIPE  
M/E  
SAFE  
TITLE  
EDIT  
GPI  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
1
AUX DELEGATION  
STORE  
MCRO  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
AUTO  
TRNS  
EFF  
DISS  
10  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
KEY2  
DSK2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
PGM  
AUX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY  
PRIOR  
BLACK  
OVER OVER  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
NEXT TRANSITION  
M/E  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
BLACK  
MIX  
EFF  
TRANSITION TYPE  
A
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
TRANS  
B
KEY1  
KEY2  
FRAMES  
DEVICE/UTILITY  
MACRO  
FTB  
ALL  
STOP  
START  
TC  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
DEV1  
DEV2  
PLAY  
STOP  
CUE  
SHTL  
JOG  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
DSK  
PVW  
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
PGM/PST  
COLOR  
BKGD  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
BLACK  
M/E  
M/E  
MIX  
WIPE  
PGM  
TRANSITION TYPE  
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
BLACK  
TRANS  
PST  
FRAMES  
DSK1  
DSK2  
MKS-2017 Wide Control Panel (1.5 M/E wide panel)  
b) The 1.5 M/E panel and the 1.5 M/E wide panel differ in the number of  
cross-point buttons. They are identical in all other respects.  
Principal differences  
The principal differences between the three control panels  
are as follows.  
Operation button positions  
The positions of some operation buttons on the 1 M/E  
panel are different from the positions of the buttons with  
the same functions on the 1.5 M/E panel and 1.5 M/E wide  
panel. This manual explains how to operate using the 1.5  
M/E panel, but figures are also provided for the 1 M/E  
panel when the buttons employed are in different  
positions.  
Control panel  
PGM/PST cross- Number of cross-  
point control  
block, PGM/PST  
transition control  
block  
point buttons  
1 M/E panel  
No  
12 per row  
a)  
1.5 M/E panel  
Yes  
12 per row  
a)  
1.5 M/E wide  
panel  
Yes  
20 per row  
10  
Control Panel Types  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Control Panel Configuration  
1.5 M/E panel and 1.5 M/E wide panel  
The sole difference between these control panels is the  
number of cross-point buttons per row. Most of the  
illustrations in this manual show the configuration of the  
1.5 M/E panel.  
See the pages in parentheses ( ) for the functions of the  
illustrated parts.  
EFFECT  
MENU  
A
POWER  
B
M/E  
1CH  
M/E  
2CH  
P/P  
MENU  
TOP/  
SHUT  
DOWN  
BVLD  
EDGE  
TRAIL/  
SHDW  
LIGHT  
SOFT  
REV  
REG  
FILE  
BORD  
N/R  
CROP  
POS  
CTR  
SET  
UP  
DIAG  
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
SAFE  
TITLE  
EDIT  
GPI  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
1
AUX DELEGATION  
STORE  
MCRO  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
DSK2  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
PGM  
AUTO  
TRNS  
EFF  
DISS  
10  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
KEY2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
AUX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY  
PRIOR  
BLACK  
OVER OVER  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
NEXT TRANSITION  
M/E  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
MIX  
EFF  
BLACK  
TRANSITION TYPE  
A
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
TRANS  
B
KEY1  
KEY2  
FRAMES  
DEVICE/UTILITY  
MACRO  
FTB  
ALL  
STOP  
START  
TC  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
DEV1  
DEV2  
PLAY  
STOP  
CUE  
SHTL  
JOG  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
DSK  
PVW  
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
PGM/PST  
COLOR  
BKGD  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
BLACK  
M/E  
M/E  
MIX  
WIPE  
PGM  
TRANSITION TYPE  
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
BLACK  
TRANS  
PST  
FRAMES  
DSK1  
DSK2  
Control Panel Configuration  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 M/E panel  
See the pages in parentheses ( ) for the functions of the  
illustrated parts.  
EFFECT  
MENU  
A
POWER  
B
M/E  
1CH  
M/E  
2CH  
MENU  
TOP/  
SHUT  
DOWN  
BVLD  
EDGE  
TRAIL/  
SHDW  
LIGHT  
SOFT  
REV  
REG  
FILE  
BORD  
N/R  
CROP  
POS  
CTR  
SET  
UP  
DIAG  
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
3
M/E  
EFF  
SAFE  
TITLE  
EDIT  
GPI  
SNAP  
SHOT  
ALL  
1
STORE  
MCRO  
DEVICE/UTILITY  
DEV1 DEV2  
MACRO  
ALL  
STOP  
START  
TC  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
AUTO  
TRNS  
EFF  
DISS  
PLAY  
STOP  
CUE  
SHTL  
JOG  
10  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
AUX DELEGATION  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
DSK2  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
PGM  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
KEY2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
OVER OVER  
AUX  
FTB  
COLOR  
BKGD  
KEY  
PRIOR  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
BLACK  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
XPT  
HOLD  
DSK  
PVW  
SHIFT  
NEXT TRANSITION  
M/E  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
BLACK  
MIX  
EFF  
TRANSITION TYPE  
A
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
BLACK  
TRANS  
B
FRAMES  
DSK1  
DSK2  
M/E Cross-Point Control Block  
Use the M/E (mix/effect) cross-point control block to  
select the video signals to be used as the video background.  
12  
Control Panel Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 Cross-point button rows  
2 XPT HOLD button  
3 SHIFT button  
Background A row  
XPT  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
M/E  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
A
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
B
4 Tally indicators  
Background B row  
a Cross-point button rows  
Select background video by pressing the corresponding  
selects the same signal as the fifth button from left in the B  
row.  
button.  
The buttons in the background A row select the  
background video which is output before the start of a  
transition (A bus video). Pressing a button selects the  
signal assigned to that button (input signals to the IN1 to  
You can use the Xpt Assign menu to freely change the  
assignment of signals to cross-point buttons.  
1)  
IN16 connectors of the processor, or signals which the  
processor generates internally). The button lights in red  
(high tally) if the selected signal is being output to the  
program video (final output video). Otherwise it lights in  
amber (low tally).  
Cross-point button numbers  
On the 1 M/E panel and the 1.5 M/E panel, there are 12  
cross-point buttons in each row. On the 1.5 M/E wide  
panel, there are 20 cross-point buttons in each row. These  
buttons are numbered 1 to 12 or 1 to 20 from the left side  
of the panel. Pressing the [SHIFT] button 3 to turn the  
shift function on makes more cross-point button numbers  
available: numbers 13 to 24, or 21 to 40. This manual  
refers to the buttons available when the shift function is on  
as “shift side buttons,” and to the buttons available when  
the shift function is off as “non-shift side buttons.”  
1) The MKS-2110M Input/Output Connector Board must be installed to use  
the IN9 to IN16 connectors.  
The buttons in the background B row select the  
background video which is output after a transition (B bus  
video). The button lights in red (high tally) if the selected  
signal is being output to the program video. It lights in  
amber (low tally) if the selected signal is not being output  
to the program video.  
See page 156 for more information about cross-point  
button numbers.  
In addition to the operating mode described above (flip-  
flop mode), you can also select bus fixed mode. In bus  
fixed mode, the signal selected on the background A row  
is always output when the fader lever is at the top, and the  
signal selected on the background B row is always output  
when the fader lever is at the bottom.  
b XPT (cross-point) HOLD button  
By pressing this button to turn it on (it lights in amber), you  
can recall a snapshot while retaining the current cross-  
point button selection state. (The cross-point selection  
information in the snapshot is ignored.)  
For more information about bus fixed mode, see “Setting  
c SHIFT button  
Press this button, turning it on, to use the cross-point  
buttons as shift side buttons. Press it again, turning it off,  
to use the cross-point buttons as non-shift side buttons.  
The buttons in the A row and the B row select the same  
signals. For example, the fifth button from left in the A row  
Control Panel Configuration  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
For more information about operations to use the  
rightmost buttons as [SHIFT] buttons, see “To use the  
Note  
This button does not light and does not function when you  
are using the rightmost buttons in the cross-point button  
rows (the 12th or 20th buttons) as [SHIFT] button.  
d Tally indicators  
Currently not used.  
PGM/PST Cross-Point Control Block  
Use the PGM/PST (program/preset) cross-point control  
block to select the video signals to be used as the  
background in program video (final output video).  
This control block is found only on the 1.5 M/E and 1.5 M/  
E wide panels.  
1 Cross-point button rows  
2 XPT HOLD button  
3 SHIFT button  
PGM row  
XPT  
SHIFT  
HOLD  
PGM/PST  
COLOR  
M/E  
BLACK  
BKGD  
PGM  
COLOR  
M/E  
BLACK  
BKGD  
PST  
M/E buttons  
PST row  
4 Tally indicator  
a Cross-point button rows  
c SHIFT button  
The buttons in the PGM (program) row select the  
background video which is output before the start of a  
transition. The buttons in the PST (preset) row select the  
background video after the end of a transition.  
The signals selectable with the cross-point buttons are the  
same as the signals selectable with the corresponding  
buttons in the M/E cross-point control block (see page 12).  
The meaning of the colors in which buttons light and  
button numbers are also the same. The [M/E] buttons at the  
right edge of each cross-point button row are reentry  
buttons. They allow you to import video created in the M/  
E block and use it as background video in the PGM/PST  
block.  
Press this button, turning it on, to use the cross-point  
buttons as shift side buttons. Press it again, turning it off,  
to use the cross-point buttons as non-shift side buttons  
Note  
This button does not light and does not function when you  
are using the rightmost buttons in the cross-point button  
rows (the 12th or 20th buttons) as [SHIFT] button.  
For more information about operations to use the  
rightmost buttons as [SHIFT] buttons, see “To use the  
b XPT (cross-point) HOLD button  
d Tally indicator  
Currently not used.  
By pressing this button to turn it on (it lights in amber), you  
can recall a snapshot while retaining the current cross-  
point button selection state. (The cross-point selection  
information in the snapshot is ignored.)  
14  
Control Panel Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
AUX Bus Control Block  
Use this block to select key signals and to select the signals  
to which a variety of functions are applied.  
2 SRC BUS button  
3 KEY button  
4 XP/KY HOLD button  
5 SHIFT button  
1 AUX delegation buttons  
AUX DELEGATION  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
KEY2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
DSK2  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
PGM  
AUX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
6 Cross-point button row  
a AUX delegation buttons  
Buttons which target two buses ([KEY1], [KEY2],  
[DSK1], [DSK2], and [FRAME MEM]) light in red if  
signals on either of the buses are being output to program  
video.  
By pressing one of the following buttons, lighting it, you  
select the bus to which the cross-point button row 6 is  
assigned. Signals selected in the cross-point button row are  
output to the bus selected here.  
The buses selectable by the various buttons are as follows.  
AUX1 to 4: AUX1 to AUX4 buses  
EDIT PVW: EDIT PVW (edit preview) bus  
UTIL: Utility bus  
KEY1: Key1 bus or Key1 Source bus. (The state of the  
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two  
buses is selected.)  
KEY2: Key2 bus or Key2 Source bus. (The state of the  
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two  
buses is selected.)  
DSK1: DSK1 (downstream key 1) bus or DSK1 Source  
(downstream key 1 source) bus. (The state of the  
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two  
buses is selected.)  
DSK2: DSK2 (downstream key 2) bus or DSK2 Source  
(downstream key 2 source) bus. (The state of the  
[SRC BUS] button 2 determines which of the two  
buses is selected.)  
CCR1 and CCR2: CCR1 (color correction 1) or CCR2  
bus  
FRAME MEM: Frame Memory Video bus, or Frame  
Memory Key bus. (The state of the [SRC BUS] button  
2 determines which of the two buses is selected.)  
b SRC (source) BUS button  
When an AUX delegation button which targets two buses  
([KEY1], [KEY2], [DSK1], [DSK2], and [FRAME  
MEM]) is turned on, the bus which is actually selected is  
determined by whether this button is on (lit) or off (not lit).  
AUX delegation  
button  
SRC BUS button SRC BUS button  
off  
on  
KEY1  
Key1 bus  
Key2 bus  
DSK1 bus  
DSK2 bus  
Key1 Source bus  
Key2 Source bus  
DSK1 Source bus  
DSK2 Source bus  
KEY2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
FRAME MEM  
Frame Memory  
Video bus  
Frame Memory  
Key bus  
c KEY button  
In the following cases, you can select the key signal in the  
cross-point button row by pressing this button to turn it on.  
• When the AUX delegation button [AUX1], [AUX2],  
[AUX3] or [AUX4] is lit.  
• When the AUX delegation button [KEY1], [KEY2],  
[DSK1], [DSK2], or [FRAME MEM] is lit with the  
[SRS BUS] button being on.  
The button lights in red (high tally) if signals on the  
selected bus are being output to the program video (final  
output video). Otherwise it lights in amber (low tally).  
d XP/KY (cross-point/key) HOLD button  
By pressing this button to turn it on (it lights in amber), you  
can recall a snapshot while retaining the current cross-  
point selection state (cross-point hold), for buses other  
Control Panel Configuration  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
than key buses. For key buses, you can select any of the  
following three options as the operating mode when a  
snapshot is recalled with this button on.  
• Cross-point hold (retain the current cross-point selection  
state)  
• Key disable (retain the current key settings)  
• Key disable, plus retention of the current key on/off  
states  
f Cross-point button row  
These buttons select the signals to be output to the bus  
selected with the AUX delegation buttons.  
The signals which can be selected with each cross-point  
button are the same as the signals selected by the  
corresponding buttons in the M/E cross-point control  
block (see page 12). Button numbers and the meaning of  
the colors in which the buttons light are the same as those  
of the buttons in the M/E cross-point control block.  
However, the cross-point button row in the AUX bus  
control block contains an [M/E] button and a [PGM]  
button, which are not present in the M/E cross-point button  
rows. The [M/E] button selects the M/E program video,  
and the [PGM] button selects the program video (final  
output video).  
173) for more information about how to set the operating  
mode.  
e SHIFT button  
Press this button, turning it on, to use the cross-point  
buttons as shift side buttons. Press this button again,  
turning it off, to use the cross-point buttons as non-shift  
side buttons.  
M/E Transition Control Block  
Use this block to control transitions in M/E (mix/effect)  
program video.  
1 Transition execution section  
2 Next transition selection buttons  
3 OVER indicators  
3 OVER indicators  
5 KEY1 ON and KEY2  
ON buttons  
OVER OVER  
KEY  
PRIOR  
KEY  
PRIOR  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
OVER OVER  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
NEXT TRANSITION  
NEXT TRANSITION  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
MIX  
EFF  
MIX  
EFF  
TRANSITION TYPE  
TRANSITION TYPE  
AUTO  
CUT  
AUTO  
CUT  
TRANS  
TRANS  
FRAMES  
FRAMES  
4 Transition type  
selection buttons  
4 Transition type  
selection buttons  
1 Transition execution  
section  
2 Next transition  
selection buttons  
M/E transition control  
block on 1.5 M/E panel  
and 1.5 M/E wide panel  
M/E transition control  
block on 1 M/E panel  
16  
Control Panel Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
a Transition execution section  
c OVER indicators  
When key 1 and key 2 are inserted, the OVER indicator for  
the key on top lights.  
(This figure shows the transition execution section on the  
1.5 M/E and 1.5 M/E wide panels.)  
Transition indicator  
d Transition type selection buttons  
To select the type of transition, press one of the following  
buttons, turning it on.  
MIX: In a background transition, the new video overlaps  
the current video, finally replacing it. During the  
transition, the sum of the output levels of the A bus and  
the B bus is maintained at 100%.  
Fader lever  
In a key transition, the key fades in (for insertion) or  
out (for removal).  
EFF (effect): A transition using the selected effect pattern  
is executed.  
AUTO  
CUT  
TRANS  
FRAMES  
information about how to select effects.  
Transition rate display section  
PST (preset) COLOR MIX : This is a two-stage mix  
(dissolve), comprising two transitions. In the first  
transition, a color matte is gradually mixed into the  
current video. In the second transition, the new video  
is gradually mixed into the color matte.  
Fader lever: Move the lever up and down to execute the  
transition.  
Transition indicator: Displays the progress of the  
transition with 24 LEDs. The number of lit LEDs  
increases as the transition proceeds.  
You can perform both of these operations in a single  
transition.  
Transition rate display section: Displays the specified  
transition rate (the time from the start to the end of the  
transition, in units of frames).  
175).  
e KEY1 ON and KEY2 ON buttons  
information about how to specify transition rates.  
Press the corresponding button to instantly insert or delete  
key 1 or key 2. The [KEY1 ON] button lights in red when  
key 1 is inserted into the program video (final output  
video). Otherwise it lights in amber. The [KEY2 ON]  
button works in the same way.  
AUTO TRANS (transition) button: Press to execute a  
transition automatically at the specified transition rate.  
The transition begins immediately, and the button  
lights in amber. The button goes out when the  
transition finishes.  
PGM/PST Transition Control Block  
CUT button: Press to execute an instant transition.  
Use this block to control program transitions.  
This control block is provided only on the 1.5 M/E and 1.5  
M/E wide panels.  
b Next transition selection buttons  
To specify which part of the video to switch (change) in  
the next transition, press one of the following buttons,  
turning it on.  
BKGD (background): Switches the background video in  
the next transition.  
KEY1, KEY2: Press the [KEY1] button, turning it on, to  
insert key 1 into the background in the next transition,  
or to delete it from the background. If key 1 is not  
currently inserted, the transition inserts it. If key 1 is  
currently inserted, the transition deletes it. The  
[KEY2] button works in the same way.  
KEY PRIOR (priority): When key 1 and key 2 are  
inserted in an overlapping state, the key on top appears  
in front on the monitor. By pressing this button,  
turning it on, you can reverse the priority of the two  
keys in the next transition.  
Control Panel Configuration  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
panel, where they are located in the M/E transition control  
block (see page 16).  
1 Transition execution section  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
1 KEY1 ON and KEY2 ON buttons  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
PST  
COLOR  
MIX  
2 AUTO TRANS buttons  
KEY1  
KEY2  
MIX  
WIPE  
TRANSITION TYPE  
AUTO  
CUT  
TRANS  
a KEY1 ON and KEY2 ON buttons  
Press the corresponding button to instantly insert or delete  
key 1 or key 2. The [KEY1 ON] button lights in red when  
key 1 is inserted into the program video (final output  
video). Otherwise it lights in amber. The [KEY2 ON]  
button works in the same way.  
FRAMES  
2 Transition type selection buttons  
b AUTO TRANS (transition) buttons  
a Transition execution section  
Press the corresponding button to insert or delete key 1 or  
key 2 at the specified transition rate. The key fades in  
(insert) or fades out (delete). The transition begins as soon  
as the button is pressed, and the button lights in amber. The  
button goes out when the transition finishes.  
This works in the same way as the transition execution  
section in the M/E transition control block (see page 16).  
b Transition type selection buttons  
To select the type of transition, press one of the following  
buttons, turning it on.  
information about how to specify transition rates.  
MIX: In a background transition, the new video overlaps  
the current video, finally replacing it. During the  
transition, the sum of the output levels of the PGM bus  
and the PST bus is maintained at 100%.  
WIPE: A transition using the selected wipe pattern is  
executed, so that the new video wipes away the current  
video.  
Downstream Key/Fade to Black  
Control Block  
Use this block to insert and delete downstream keys, and  
to fade to black.  
On how to select a wipe pattern, see “Selecting  
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first transition, a color  
matte is gradually mixed into the current video. In the  
second transition, the new video is gradually mixed  
into the color matte.  
FTB  
1 FTB button  
You can perform both of these operations in a single  
transition.  
DSK  
PVW  
2 DSK PVW button  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
175).  
3 DSK independent transition  
execution section  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
M/E Key Transition Control Block  
DSK1  
DSK2  
Use this block to insert and delete keys in independent M/  
E background video transitions. The transitions are  
independent of the transitions performed with the M/E  
transition control block (see page 16).  
This control block is provided only on the 1.5 M/E and 1.5  
M/E wide panels. However, of the four buttons, the [KEY1  
ON] and [KEY2 ON] buttons are also found on the 1 M/E  
a FTB (fade to black) button  
Press this button to execute a fade to black at the specified  
transition rate. The button lights in amber when pressed. It  
lights in red when the fade to black is completed, for as  
long as black is output.  
18  
Control Panel Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
information about how to specify transition rates.  
information about how to specify transition rates.  
b DSK PVW (downstream key preview) button  
You can press this button, turning it on, to temporarily  
switch M/E PVW output (1 M/E panel) or PST output (1.5  
M/E panel) to DSK PVW output.  
Flexi Pad Control Block  
Use the Flexi Pad control block in the following four  
operation modes.  
• Effect snapshot mode  
• Snapshot mode  
• Macro mode  
Note  
Whether or not this switching function is available  
depends on a setting made in the Output Assign menu. For  
• Transition rate input mode  
Depending on the operation mode, this control block  
allows you to do the following.  
c DSK independent transition execution section  
DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON buttons: Press the [DSK1 ON]  
button to cut downstream key 1 in or out (insert or  
delete it instantly). The button lights in red when the  
key is inserted in program video (final output video).  
Otherwise it lights in amber. The [DSK2 ON] button  
works in the same way.  
In effect snaphot mode:  
• Recall, save, and delete effect snapshots  
• Recall effect pattern numbers  
In snaphot mode:  
• Recall, save, and delete snapshots  
AUTO TRANS buttons: Press the corresponding button  
to insert or delete downstream key 1 or 2 at the  
specified transition rate. The key is mixed to fade in  
(insert) or out (delete). The transition begins as soon as  
the button is pressed, and the button lights in amber.  
When the transition finishes, the button goes out.  
• Set snapshot attributes  
In macro mode:  
Recall (execute), save, delete, and edit macros  
In transition rate input mode:  
Enter transition rates  
1 Numeric display  
7
8
5
9
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
4
1
0
6
3
2 Region selection buttons  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
2
3 STORE button  
STORE  
MCRO  
TC  
ENTR  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
4 BANK SEL button  
6 Memory recall buttons  
5 Mode selection buttons  
This figure shows the Flexi Pad control block  
in transition rate input mode.  
a Numeric display  
In transition rate input mode: Transition rate  
Macro mode  
• In macro recall mode: A bank number and register  
Depending on the operation mode, this shows an effect  
pattern number, a bank number, a register number, an  
event number, an event total, a pause duration, or a  
transition rate, in up to four digits.  
number  
• In macro edit mode: An event number and an event  
total  
In effect snapshot mode: Pattern number  
In snapshot mode: Bank number and register number  
• In pause duration entry mode: A pause duration  
Control Panel Configuration  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Region selection buttons  
Used in modes other than macro mode.  
Select the target function block of the operation. The  
button which is on lights in amber.  
In effect snapshot mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9]  
buttons, a [PTN NO. (pattern number)] button, and an  
[ENTR (enter)] button.  
M/E button: Selects the M/E region.  
The state and functions of the [0] to [9] buttons and the  
[ENTR] button change depending on the state of the  
[PTN NO.] button and the [STORE] button.  
PP/ALL (PGM/PST/all) button (on 1.5 M/E panel): In  
snapshot mode, selects all regions. In transition rate  
input mode and effect snapshot mode, selects the  
PGM/PST region.  
ALL button (on 1 M/E panel): In snapshot mode, selects  
all regions. Has no effect in transition rate input mode  
and effect snapshot mode.  
In snapshot mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9] buttons, an  
[EFF DISS (effect dissolve)] button, and an [AUTO  
TRNS (transition)] button. The state and functions of  
these buttons change depending on the state of the  
[BANK SEL] button and the [STORE] button.  
c STORE button  
Used in modes other than transition rate input mode.  
This button lights in amber when on, to indicate that you  
can save the current snapshot or effect snapshot, enter  
macro edit mode, or delete a saved snapshot, effect  
snapshot, or macro.  
In macro mode  
d BANK SEL (selection) button  
• In macro recall mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9]  
buttons, an [Executed events/Total Events] button,  
and a [TAKE] button. The state and functions of the  
buttons change depending on the states of the  
[BANK SEL] and [STORE] buttons.  
• In macro edit mode: Comprised of the [INS (insert)]  
button, [MOD (modify)] button, [DEL (delete)]  
button, [PAUS (pause)] button, [ALL (select all)]  
button, [EXIT] button, [AUTO INS (auto insert)]  
button, [STOR/Register Number (Store/register  
number)] button, [<< PREV (goto previous event)]  
button, and [NEXT >> (goto next event)] button.  
• In pause time entry mode: Comprised of the [0] to  
[9] buttons, a [CLR (clear)] button, and a [PAUS/  
ENTR (pause/enter)] button.  
Used in snapshot mode or macro mode. Has no effect in  
other modes.  
This button lights in amber when on, to indicate that you  
can use the memory recall buttons to specify a snapshot or  
macro register bank.  
e Mode selection buttons  
Select the operation mode of the Flexi Pad control block.  
The button currently turned on lights in amber.  
EFF/WIPE (effect shapshot): Selects effect snapshot  
mode. You can also use this button when selecting  
effect patterns.  
SNAPSHOT: Selects snapshot mode.  
MCRO (macro): Selects macro mode. Lights in amber in  
macro recall mode, and lights in red in macro edit  
mode.  
TRANS RATE: Selects transition rate input mode.  
In transition rate input mode: Comprised of the [0] to [9]  
f Memory recall buttons  
buttons, and an [ENTR (enter)] button.  
The configuration of the memory recall buttons changes  
according to the operation mode selected with the mode  
selection buttons.  
Effect/Wipe Control Block  
Use this block to set the direction of effects and wipes. You  
can also add modifiers as required.  
20  
Control Panel Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1 Delegation selection buttons  
EFFECT  
M/E  
1CH  
M/E  
2CH  
P/P  
MENU  
BVLD  
EDGE  
TRAIL/  
SHDW  
LIGHT  
SOFT  
REV  
BORD  
N/R  
CROP  
POS  
2 Joystick  
CTR  
3 Effect modifier buttons  
a Delegation selection buttons  
Select operation targets.  
M/E 1CH (M/E1 channel), M/E 2CH (M/E2 channel)  
buttons: Select M/E1 channel or M/E2 channel or  
both as the operation target(s).  
P/P (PGM/PST) button (on 1.5 M/E panels only):  
Selects PGM/PST as the operation target.  
MENU button: When this button is on, you can use the  
joystick to adjust the lefttmost three parameters  
assigned to the knobs in the menu control block.  
When the [MENU] button is on, you can use this to adjust  
parameters. Operation of the joystick is linked with  
operation of the knobs in the menu control block.  
Parameter assigned to knob 1: The value increases when  
the joystick is moved to the right, and decreases when  
the joystick is moved to the left.  
Parameter assigned to knob 2: The value increases when  
the joystick is moved away from you, and decreases  
when the joystick is moved toward you.  
Parameter assigned to knob 3: The value increases when  
the knob of the joystick is rotated clockwise, and  
decreases when it is rotated counterclockwise.  
The adjustment range depends on the parameter.  
Notes  
• The [M/E 2CH] button does not light and cannot be  
selected for effect patterns with numbers lower than  
2000.  
• When the [SHTL] button or [JOG] button in the utility  
control block is on, turning a delegation selection button  
on turns the [SHTL] button or [JOG] button off. (The  
button pressed later receives priority).  
When the [SHTL] button or [JOG] button in the utility  
control block is on, the joystick can be used to control jog  
and shuttle mode search on devices.  
Move the joystick to the right for forward direction search,  
and left for reverse direction search.  
c Effect modifier buttons  
b Joystick  
BVLD (beveled) EDGE: When this button is on, you can  
add beveled edges to the image. This button lights in  
green when beveled edge parameters are assigned to  
the knobs in the menu control block, and lights in  
amber when no beveled edge parameters are assigned  
to the knobs.  
LIGHT (lighting): When this button is on, you can add a  
lighting effect to the image. This button lights in green  
when lighting parameters are assigned to the knobs in  
the menu control block, and lights in amber when no  
lighting parameters are assigned to the knobs.  
TRAIL/SHDW (shadow): When this button is on, you  
can add a shadow to the image. This button lights in  
green when shadow parameters are assigned to the  
knobs in the menu control block, and lights in amber  
when no shadow parameters are assigned to the knobs.  
When one of the [M/E 1CH], [M/E 2CH], and [P/P]  
buttons is on, you can use the joystick to adjust the position  
of the currently selected effect pattern. For some effect  
patterns, the joystick can be used to change their size.  
X-axis position: The X value increases when the joystick  
is moved to the right, and decreases when the joystick  
is moved to the left.  
Y-axis position: The Y value increases when the joystick  
is moved away from you, and decreases when the  
joystick is moved toward you.  
Size: The value increases when the knob of the joystick is  
rotated clockwise, and decreases when it is rotated  
counterclockwise.  
Control Panel Configuration  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BORD (border): When this button is on, you can add  
borders. The button lights in amber when no border  
parameters have been assigned to the knobs in the  
menu control block, and lights in green when they  
have been assigned.  
menu control block, and lights in green when they  
have been assigned.  
N/R (normal/reverse): When this button is on, it lights in  
amber and the transition direction reverses every time  
a transition finishes.  
SOFT (soft edges): When this button is on, you can add  
soft edges. The button lights in amber when no soft  
edge parameters have been assigned to the knobs in the  
menu control block, and lights in green when they  
have been assigned.  
CROP button: When this button is on, you can perform  
cropping. The button lights in amber when no crop  
parameters have been assigned to the knobs in the  
REV: When this button is on, it lights in amber and the  
transition direction reverses.  
POS (position) button: You can turn the positioner on  
and use the joystick to move effect patterns in the x-  
axis and y-axis directions, and to change their size.  
CTR (center) button: When the [POS] button is on,  
pressing this button returns an effect pattern to the  
default position and size.  
Utility Control Block  
ENABLE/UTILITY  
1 ENABLE/UTILITY operation buttons  
SAFE  
TITLE  
EDIT  
GPI  
DEVICE/UTILITY  
2 DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons  
ALL  
STOP  
START  
TC  
DEV1  
DEV2  
PLAY  
STOP  
CUE  
SHTL  
JOG  
a ENABLE/UTILITY operation buttons  
You can assign utility commands to these buttons.  
JOG: Turns jog mode on and off.  
The following utility commands are assigned by default.  
EDIT button: Enables and disables the switcher edit  
mode.  
GPI button: Enables and disables switcher GPI.  
SAFE TITLE button: Turns on and off a marker showing  
the television reception safe area and a cross marker  
showing the center of the screen.  
Note  
When a delegation selection button is on, turning the  
[SHTL] or [JOG] button on turns the delegation button off.  
(The button pressed later receives priority).  
information about how to assign arbitrary utility  
commands to these buttons.  
Blank button: No function assignment.  
information about how to assign arbitrary utility  
commands to these buttons.  
b DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons  
You can assign utility commands to these buttons.  
The following utility commands are assigned by default.  
DEV1/DEV2: Selects the Device1/Device2 as control  
target.  
PLAY: Plays a tape or disk.  
STOP: Stops a tape or disk.  
ALL STOP: Stops tapes or disks on all devices.  
CUE: Cue up.  
START TC: Sets the current timecode as the start point.  
SHTL: Turns shuttle mode on and off.  
22  
Control Panel Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Macro Control Block  
Menu Control Block  
1 Top menu selection buttons  
MACRO  
Menu display  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
MENU  
TOP/  
SHUT  
DOWN  
3 ATTCH ENBL button  
2 POST MCRO button  
1 PRE MCRO button  
REG  
FILE  
SET  
UP  
DIAG  
a PRE MCRO button  
Use this button to set a macro attachment in pre macro  
mode.  
When you make settings in macro only mode, this button  
is used together with the Macro Only Set button, assigned  
to one of the buttons in the utility control block.  
2 Knobs  
a Top menu selection buttons  
Select the menu shown in the menu display.  
• TOP/SHUTDOWN (top menu/shutdown) button  
• REG (register menu) button  
• FILE (file menu) button  
• SET UP (setup menu) button  
b POST MCRO button  
Use this button to set a macro attachment in post macro  
mode.  
When you make settings in macro only mode, this button  
is used together with the Macro Only Set button, assigned  
to one of the buttons in the utility control block.  
• DIAG (diagnostics menu) button  
c ATTCH ENBL (attachment enable) button  
b Knobs  
Use to adjust parameters shown in the menus.  
When this button is on, macro attachments assigned to  
buttons on the control panel are enabled.  
Power Indicators, “Memory Stick”  
Slot, USB Connector  
A
POWER  
B
1 Power A and B status indicators  
2 “Memory Stick” status indicator  
3 “Memory Stick” slot  
4 USB connector  
a Power A and B status indicators  
Two power supplies (A and B) can be installed in the  
control panel. When the control panel is powered on, the  
indicators corresponding to the installed power supplies  
light in green.  
Control Panel Configuration  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Installing a second power supply requires the optional HK-  
PSU11 Power Supply Unit.  
“Memory Sticks”  
b “Memory Stick” status indicator  
Lights in red during access to a “Memory Stick.”  
Usable “Memory Sticks”  
c “Memory Stick” slot  
Insert “Memory Sticks.”  
The following types of “Memory Stick” can be used with  
this system.  
about the usable “Memory Sticks” and their handling.  
• MSH-32/64/128 “Memory Stick”  
• MSX-256S/512S/1GS “Memory Stick PRO”  
• MSH-M32N/M64N/M128N “Memory Stick Duo”  
• MSX-M256S/M512S “Memory Stick PRO Duo”  
d USB connector  
Devices compatible with the USB 1.1 standard can be  
connected. Currently this connector is not used.  
Notes  
• When using a “Memory Stick PRO,” high-rate data  
transfer using parallel interface is not supported.  
• This system does not support the MagicGate function.  
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo,” be sure to use it  
with a “Memory Stick Duo Adaptor” (MSAC-M2 or  
equivalent). If you insert a “Memory Stick Duo” without  
using the adaptor, there is the possibility that the stick  
cannot be removed, resulting in a serious accident.  
Handling “Memory Sticks”  
When using “Memory Sticks,” pay attention to the  
following points.  
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with  
anything, including your finger or metallic objects.  
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to  
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.  
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the  
labeling position.  
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.  
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.  
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that  
is:  
-Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun  
-Under direct sunlight  
-Very humid or subject to corrosive substances  
24  
“Memory Sticks”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Using Menus  
Chapter  
Accessing Menus  
The menus of this switcher enable you to make system settings and settings  
related to effects.  
To access menus, you can use any of the following three methods.  
• Access from the top menu (see next section)  
• Access by double clicking (see page 26)  
• Access by single clicking (see page 28)  
Accessing Menus From the Top Menu  
By pressing a top menu selection button in the menu control block (see page  
23), you can directly access the menu page for that button. The menus which can  
be accessed with top menu selection buttons are as follows.  
Menus accessed with top menu selection buttons and their functions  
Button  
Menu  
Function  
Reference  
page  
TOP/SHUTDOWN Top/Shutdown  
Display the top menu, and Page 42  
exit the menu system.  
a), b)  
REG  
Make register settings.  
Make file settings.  
Register  
a)  
FILE  
File  
a)  
SET UP  
Make settings related to  
setup, and to display of  
error status and error  
logs.  
Setup/Diagnosis  
DIAG  
Diagnosis  
Display error status and  
error logs.  
“Error  
Messages”  
in the  
Appendix  
(separate  
document)  
a) The most recently used menu is displayed.  
b) Currently not supported.  
To access a menu from the top menu, proceed as follows.  
Accessing Menus  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note  
The menu illustrations in this manual may differ in appearance from the menus  
actually shown in the menu display of the control panel.  
1
Press the [TOP/SHUTDOWN] button in the menu control block.  
The top menu appears.  
Tip  
If you press the [FILE], [SET UP], or [DIAG] button, the page for that  
button appears.  
2
3
In the Top Menu area, select a menu.  
The second-level menu of the menu selected in the Top Menu area appears  
in the Sub Menu area.  
Select a menu in the Sub Menu area.  
If the menu has only two levels, the page for the second-level menu appears.  
If the menu has three levels, a popup window appears so that you can select  
a third-level menu.  
4
Select a menu from the popup window.  
The third-level menu appears.  
Accessing Menus by Double Clicking  
This manual uses the term “double click” to refer to the action of pressing a  
button on the control panel twice in rapid succession (comparable to double  
clicking a computer mouse button). You can double click many of the buttons  
on the control panel except the top menu selection buttons to directly access  
menus related to those buttons. The following table shows the buttons which  
access menus by double clicking and the accessed menus.  
Tip  
The ability to access menus by double clicking is indicated by a horizontal bar  
on the face of the button, located over the button name.  
26  
Accessing Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Menus accessed by double clicking  
Button  
location  
Button  
Menu  
Referenc  
e page  
a)  
a)  
a)  
M/E cross-point  
control block  
Misc >Color Bkgd  
COLOR BKGD  
a)  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
CCR >CCR1 >Primary  
CCR >CCR2 >Primary  
Misc >Color Bkgd  
FM1 VIDEO  
a)  
FM1 KEY  
a)  
FM2 VIDEO  
a)  
FM2 KEY  
a)  
FM3 VIDEO  
a)  
FM3 KEY  
a)  
CCR1  
a)  
CCR2  
PGM/PST  
cross-point  
control block  
COLOR BKGD  
a)  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
CCR >CCR1 >Primary  
CCR >CCR2 >Primary  
Misc >Color Bkgd  
b)  
FM1 VIDEO  
a)  
FM1 KEY  
a)  
FM2 VIDEO  
a)  
FM2 KEY  
a)  
FM3 VIDEO  
a)  
FM3 KEY  
a)  
CCR1  
a)  
CCR2  
AUX bus  
COLOR BKGD  
control block  
(cross-point  
button rows)  
a)  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
Frame Memory >Recall  
CCR >CCR1 >Primary  
CCR >CCR2 >Primary  
FM1 VIDEO  
a)  
FM1 KEY  
a)  
FM2 VIDEO  
a)  
FM2 KEY  
a)  
FM3 VIDEO  
a)  
FM3 KEY  
a)  
CCR1  
a)  
CCR2  
AUX bus  
control block  
(AUX  
delegation  
buttons)  
KEY1  
Key >M/E Key1 >Main  
Key >M/E Key2 >Main  
Key >DSK1 >Main  
KEY2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
Key >DSK2 >Main  
CCR1  
CCR >CCR1 >Primary  
CCR >CCR2 >Primary  
Frame Memory >Freeze  
CCR2  
FRAME MEM  
Accessing Menus  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus accessed by double clicking  
Button  
location  
Button  
Menu  
Referenc  
e page  
M/E transition  
control block  
KEY1  
KEY2  
EFF  
Key >M/E Key1 >Main  
Key >M/E Key2 >Main  
Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main Page 63  
PST COLOR MIX  
WIPE  
Misc >Transition  
PGM/PST  
transition  
control block  
Effect/Wipe >P/P Wipe >Main  
Misc >Transition  
PST COLOR MIX  
b)  
Flexi Pad  
control block  
M/E + EFF/WIPE  
Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main Page 63  
PP/ALL + EFF/  
WIPE  
Effect/Wipe >P/P Wipe >Main  
Misc >Transition  
b)  
TRANS RATE  
M/E 1CH  
Effect/Wipe  
control block  
Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main Page 63  
Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main  
M/E 2CH  
b)  
Effect/Wipe >P/P Wipe >Main  
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status  
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status  
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status  
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status  
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status  
Misc >DDR/VTR >TC Status  
P/P  
c)  
Utility control  
block  
Device1  
c)  
Device2  
c)  
Device3  
c)  
Device4  
c)  
Device5  
c)  
Device6  
a) Button assigned with Video/Key Pair Assign menu (see page 159).  
b) Not found on 1 M/E panel.  
c) Button assigned with Utility menu (see page 170).  
Accessing Menus by Single Clicking  
A menu appears when you single click a parameter adjustment button to turn the  
adjustment function on (and the knobs take on the parameters which can be  
assigned for the adjustment). The buttons which access menus by single clicking  
are the following buttons in the Effect/Wipe control block.  
• [BVLD EDGE] button  
• [LIGHT] button  
• [TRAIL/SHDW] button  
• [BORD] button  
• [SOFT] button  
• [CROP] button  
28  
Accessing Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Interpreting Menu Screens  
There are two types of menu screen.  
• Basic screen (see next section)  
• Popup windows  
- General popup windows (see page 32)  
- General popup windows (scrolling type) (see page 33)  
- Numeric keypad window/timecode window (see page 33)  
- Hexadecimal keypad window (see page 35)  
- Keyboard window (see page 36)  
- Page number input window (see page 38)  
Basic Screen  
1 Menu page number button  
2 Back button  
3 Fwd button  
4 Menu switch buttons  
7 Button area and status area  
(The figure shows a button  
area only.)  
6 Parameter buttons  
5 Menu title buttons  
a Menu page number button  
This shows the menu screen page number.  
When you press this button, the page number input window (see page 38)  
appears. Enter a page number in that window to display the desired menu.  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
For details about page numbers, refer to “Menu Tree” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
b Back button  
Returns to the most recently displayed menu. You can go back up to maximum  
of 50 menus.  
This button is disabled when the display history has been erased and when you  
have backed up through the entire display history.  
For details about operation, see “Selecting menus from the display history”  
c Fwd (forward) button  
Redisplays the menu that was visible when you last pressed the Back button.  
This button is disabled when the display history has been erased, when you have  
moved forward through the entire display history, and when the display history  
has been updated by displaying a new menu.  
For details about operation, see “Selecting menus from the display history”  
d Menu switch buttons  
You can use the following buttons to switch between the menus when you have  
selected a Key menu or an Effect/Wipe menu.  
Main Menu button: Displays a menu with frequently used items.  
Detail Menu button: Displays a popup window for selecting menus to make  
detailed settings.  
e Menu title buttons  
Except for the Top button, these buttons display the title of the selected of the  
selected menu. The upper buttons correspond to upper level menus. In the  
example of the previous figure, [Top] is the top menu, [Key] is a first-level  
menu, and [M/E Key1] is a second-level menu.  
When you press a button, a popup window appears to allow you to select a menu  
from the next level.  
f Parameter buttons  
Parameters adjustable by knobs and their values are shown on the buttons.  
When you press one of these buttons, the numeric keypad window (see page 33)  
opens so that you can enter a setting value.  
g Button area and status area  
The button area displays the buttons of the operation target items in the selected  
menu.  
In the setup menu and other menus, a status area may also be displayed to show  
lists for selecting setting values (see following figure).  
30  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Status area  
Button area  
Interpreting buttons  
The following figure shows the information displayed on function buttons.  
Function name  
Lights in light blue when parameters  
are assigned to knobs.  
Icon  
Status display  
The following table shows how to interpret other buttons.  
Name  
Display  
State  
Parameter  
button  
Value displayed. Value can be changed.  
Execute button  
Not executing function.  
Executing function (lit in light purple).  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Icons displayed on buttons  
The following table shows the icons which are displayed on buttons, and the  
functions which they represent. The functions are executed when a button with  
the corresponding icon is pressed.  
Name  
Display  
Function  
Popup icon  
Open a popup window.  
Numeric keypad  
icon  
Open the numeric keypad window, the  
timecode window, the hexadecimal keypad  
window, or the page number input window.  
Keyboard icon  
Open the keyboard window.  
Shortcut icons  
Close icon  
Switch the menu display.  
Close a popup window.  
Scroll icons  
• Scroll the function button area.  
• Scroll the list in the status area.  
• Switch a pattern.  
Knob assigner  
icon  
Assign a parameter to a knob.  
Window hold  
icon  
Do not close a popup window even when a  
function selection button is pressed.  
Popup Windows  
General popup windows  
When you press a button with the  
screen.  
icon, a popup window opens in the basic  
The popup window may be the scrolling type. For details, see the next section.  
2 Close button  
1 Function button area  
a Function button area  
Displays functions and menus for selection. The currently selected button lights  
in light blue.  
The popup window closes when you press a button in this area.  
32  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Close button  
Closes the popup window.  
General popup windows (scrolling type)  
2 Scroll buttons  
1 Function button area  
5 Close button  
4 Page Up, Page Down buttons  
3 Window Hold button  
a Function button area  
Displays functions and menus for selection.  
The popup window closes when you press a button in this area. However, it does  
not close if the [Window Hold] button is on.  
b Scroll buttons  
Scroll the function button area up and down.  
c Window Hold button  
Press this button, turning it on, if you want to keep the window open even after  
pressing a button in the function button area.  
d Page Up, Page Down buttons  
Scroll the function button area up and down in page units.  
e Close button  
Closes the popup window (even when the [Window Hold] button is on).  
Numeric keypad window/timecode window  
The numeric keypad window or timecode window opens when you press a  
button which is associated with parameter numeric input or timecode input. The  
icon appears on the button.  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Input value display  
2 Minimum to maximum display  
3 Item display  
4 – (minus) button  
5 Close button  
8 Clear button  
7 Enter button  
6 Numeric input buttons  
a Input value display  
Shows the value entered in the numeric keypad window or the timecode  
window.  
In the timecode window, values are shown in the format HH:MM:SS:FF  
(Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames).  
About timecode input  
• A colon (:) is displayed automatically after every second digit when you enter  
three or more digits.  
• Timecode is displayed in red if an entered value exceeds the setting range.  
Timecode input examples  
The following table shows examples of timecode input  
Digits entered  
[1], [2]  
Display  
Setting value  
12 00:00:00:12  
[1], [2], [2], [0]  
[1], [2], [2], [0], [5]  
12:20 00:00:12:20  
1:22:05 00:01:22:05  
b Minimum to maximum display  
Displays the minimum and maximum values that can be set for the parameter.  
Does not display anything in the timecode window.  
34  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c Item display  
Displays the name of the parameter being set in the numeric keypad window or  
timecode window.  
d – (minus) button  
Changes the sign of the input value.  
Each press toggles between plus (+) and minus (–).  
Not supported in the timecode window.  
e Close button  
Closes the numeric keypad window or the timecode window.  
f Numeric input buttons  
Use these buttons to enter the value you want to set.  
In the timecode window, the [.] button changes into a [00] button.  
g Enter button  
Confirms the entered value.  
If the value is valid, the numeric keypad window or the timecode window  
closes.  
If the value is not valid, the window stays open and the color of the input value  
display changes to red.  
h Clear button  
Clears the input. However, parameter settings are not changed.  
Hexadecimal keypad window  
The hexadecimal keypad window opens when you press a button which is  
associated with hexadecimal parameter input. The  
button.  
icon appears on the  
1 Input value display  
2 Item display  
3 Minimum to maximum display  
4 Close button  
6 Clear button  
5 Enter button  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
a Input value display  
Shows the value entered in the hexadecimal keypad window.  
b Item display  
Displays the name of the parameter being set in the hexadecimal keypad  
window.  
c Minimum to maximum display  
Displays the minimum and maximum values that can be set for the parameter.  
d Close button  
Closes the hexadecimal keypad window.  
e Enter button  
Confirms the entered value.  
If the value is valid, the hexadecimal keypad window closes.  
If the value is not valid, the hexadecimal keypad window stays open and the  
color of the input value display changes to red.  
f Clear button  
Clears the input. However, parameter settings are not changed.  
Keyboard window  
The keyboard window opens in the basic screen when you press a button with  
the  
icon.  
36  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Item display  
2 Input string display  
3 Left button  
4 Right button  
5 Close button  
qa Enter button  
q; Del button  
9 Clear button  
8 BS button  
7 Shift button  
6 Caps Lock button  
a Item display  
Shows the name of the parameter being set in the keyboard window.  
b Input string display  
Shows the character string being input in the keyboard window.  
c Left button  
Moves the cursor one character to the left in the input string.  
d Right button  
Moves the cursor one character to the right in the input string.  
e Close button  
Closes the keyboard window.  
f Caps Lock button  
Switches between input of capital letters and lowercase letters.  
g Shift button  
Enables input of characters on the shift side of the buttons. The shift is released  
when you enter a character.  
h BS (backspace) button  
Clears the character immediately before the cursor in the input string.  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
i Clear button  
Clears all of the characters in the input string.  
j Del (delete) button  
Clears the character immediately after the cursor in the input string.  
k Enter button  
Sets the input string as a parameter value.  
Closes the keyboard window if the value was valid. If the value was not valid,  
the window stays open and the color of the input value display  
changes to red.  
Page number input window  
The page number input window opens in the basic screen when you press a  
menu page number button.  
1 Input value display  
2 Item display  
3 Clear button  
5 Close button  
4 Enter button  
a Input value display  
Shows the value entered in the page number input window.  
b Item display  
Shows that the value you are entering is a page number.  
c Clear button  
Clears the input value.  
d Enter button  
Confirms the input value.  
e Close button  
Closes the page number input window.  
38  
Interpreting Menu Screens  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Basic Menu Operations  
Selecting Menus  
There are three ways to select menus.  
• Navigate the menu tree (see next section)  
• Enter a page number (see page 40)  
• Select from the display history (see page 40)  
Selecting by navigating the menu tree  
You can display a desired menu by navigating to it through the menu tree from  
the currently displayed menu.  
The following example shows how to select the Color Bkgd menu under the  
Misc menu when you are in the Main menu under a Key menu for the M/E bank.  
In this manual, menu names and paths are indicated in the fashion “Key >M/E  
Key1 >Main.”  
Menu tree  
Key  
ME Key 1  
Main  
1
3
Effect/Wipe  
CCR  
Frame Memory  
Misc  
Transition  
Color Bkgd  
Enable  
DDR/VTR  
2
4
1
2
Press [Top].  
A popup window for selection of first-level menus appears.  
Select [Misc].  
The popup window closes and the display changes to the Misc menu. The  
display on the second and third menu title buttons from the top changes to  
the display of the Misc menu.  
3
Press the second menu title button from the top.  
A popup window for selection of second-level menus appears.  
Basic Menu Operations  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4
Select [Color Bkgd].  
The popup window closes and the display changes to the Color Bkgd menu.  
Selecting menus by entering page numbers  
You can display a desired menu by entering its page number.  
For more information about page numbers, refer to “Menu Tree” in the  
Appendix (separate document).  
1
2
Press the menu page number button.  
The page number input window (see page 38) appears.  
Enter the page number of the desired menu and press the [Enter] button.  
The page number input window closes and the display changes to the  
desired menu.  
Selecting menus from the display history  
You can redisplay menus that have appeared in the past.  
For example, if you have displayed menus in the order 1000 t 2000 t 3000  
t 4000, you can go back to menu 2000 by pressing the [Back] button twice.  
After using the [Back] button, you can return in the reverse direction by using  
the [Fwd] button. In the above example, press the [Fwd] button twice to return  
to menu 4000.  
Selecting Functions  
Setting Parameters  
To select a function, press the corresponding button in the button area of the  
basic screen.  
The selected button lights in light blue.  
Depending on the button, a popup window may appear so that you can select  
further items. Functions may also be assigned to knobs.  
See “Interpreting buttons” (page 31) for illustrations of how buttons change in  
appearance when they are selected.  
Parameter buttons light in light blue when they are pressed, and the parameters  
are assigned to knobs. Also, the parameter group name appears above the  
parameter button group. When you press a button to which a parameter has been  
assigned, the numeric keypad window opens so that you can input a numeric  
value. Or you may be able to set the parameter by rotating a knob. Parameters  
are assigned to knobs 1 to 5 in the order of parameter buttons from the left.  
When 6 or more parameters have been assigned, the 5th button functions as a  
page switch button (the [More] button). For example, when 8 parameters have  
been assigned, buttons 1 to 4 on menu page 1/2 are assigned to knobs 1 to 4  
initially, and buttons 5 to 8 on menu page 2/2 are assigned to knobs 1 to 4 by  
page switching.  
40  
Basic Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Parameter group name  
Knob 3  
Knob 4  
Knob 5  
Knob 1  
Knob 2  
Parameter values can be set with either of the following methods.  
• Rotate the knobs (1 to 5) corresponding to the parameters.  
• Press the parameter button corresponding to a parameter, and enter a numeric  
value in the numeric keypad window.  
Parameter values are indicated by the length of the bars on the buttons and by  
the numeric values under the bars.  
In explaining specific operations, this manual gives examples of typical knob  
settings, expressed as shown below.  
Example 1: When a pattern key is selected  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 to 24  
1 (Size)  
2 (Soft)  
Size of pattern  
Softness of edge width  
Key density  
3 (Density)  
4 (Pattern)  
Pattern number  
Example 2: When a video process is selected  
(The buttons of parameter group 1/2 are shown first, changing to parameter  
group 2/2 when the [More] button in the position of knob 5 is pressed.  
Parameter group 1/2  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Video Gain)  
3 (Y Gain)  
Overall gain of video signals  
Gain of luminance signals  
Black level  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–7.30 to +109.58  
4 (Black Level)  
Parameter group 2/2  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Video Gain)  
3 (C Gain)  
4 (Hue Delay)  
Overall gain of video signals  
Gain of chrominance signals  
Amount of hue offset  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
Basic Menu Operations  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Exiting the Menu System  
To exit the menu system, proceed as follows.  
Note  
Always exit the menu system before powering the control panel off.  
1
2
3
In the menu control block, press the [TOP/SHUTDOWN] button.  
The top menu appears.  
Press [Shutdown].  
A confirmation popup window appears.  
Press [Yes].  
This shuts down the menu system after a while, and the menu display  
changes to black. Now power off the system.  
To cancel the exit  
Press [No].  
To restart the menu system  
Power on the control panel once more.  
42  
Exiting the Menu System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basics of Video  
Switching  
Chapter  
This chapter begins by explaining how to switch background signals on the M/  
E bank (how to perform transitions). Then it explains basic background video  
switching on the PGM/PST bank when a 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel  
is used.  
The examples in this chapter assume that the following signals are currently  
selectable with the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th cross-point buttons from the left.  
Signal selectable with the 2nd button from the left: Landscape  
video signal  
Signal selectable with the 3rd button from the left: Lion video signal  
Signal selectable with the 4th button from the left: Castle video  
signal  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E  
Bank  
Let’s begin by using the M/E bank to select video signals showing a landscape  
and a lion as background video, and to switch between them with an effect.  
As the effect, we will use effect number 0024 (circular wipe). A wipe is an effect  
which the current video is wiped away by new video using a selected pattern.  
The video changes as follows.  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Preparations for operation  
• If you are using the 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel, press and light the  
[M/E] buttons at the right edge of the PGM and PST button rows of the PGM/  
PST cross-point control block.  
• Before starting, move the fader lever from one end of its range to the other,  
and stop it at the top position.  
After finishing the above preparations, proceed as follows.  
1
2
3
4 6,7  
5
1 2  
6,7 3 4  
5
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
44  
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E Bank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
2
In the background A row of the M/E cross-point control block, select the A  
bus video.  
For this example, press the 2nd button from the left to select the landscape  
video signal.  
The landscape video appears on the video monitor connected to the  
processor’s program output (final output) connector. The pressed button  
lights in red to indicate that the signal assigned to the button is being output  
to the program video.  
In the background B row, select the B bus video.  
For this example, press the 3rd button from the left to select the lion video  
signal.  
The pressed button lights in amber to indicate that the signal assigned to the  
button has only been selected. It is not yet being output to the program  
video.  
3
4
5
In the M/E transition control block, press the [BKGD] next transition  
selection button, lighting it. (Skip this step if the button is already lit.)  
The background video is selected as the target of the transition.  
In the M/E transition control block, press the [EFF] transition type selection  
button, lighting it. (Skip this step if the button is already lit.)  
An effect is selected as the transition type.  
Select the effect pattern (number 0024).  
There are three ways to select effect patterns. In this example, we will use  
the Flexi Pad control block.  
1) Press the [M/E] button in the Flexi Pad control block, lighting it.  
2) Press the [EFF/WIPE] button in the Flexi Pad control block, lighting it.  
3) Press the [PTN NO.] button, lighting it in green.  
4) With the numeric buttons, enter the digits 2,4, in that order.  
The number that you entered appears in the numeric display.  
5) Press the [ENTR] button.  
Pattern number 0024 is selected.  
6
Slowly move the fader lever down from the top position.  
A wipe transition using pattern number 0024 begins. A circle showing part  
of the video of the B bus (the lion) appears at the center of the A bus video  
(the landscape). The circle gradually grows larger, increasing the area  
occupied by the B bus video. While this is happening, the transition  
indicator LEDs to the left of the fader lever begin to light, starting from the  
top. The number of lit LEDs increases as the transition progresses.  
At this point, notice how the buttons in the background A row and the  
background B row are lit. The button in the A row remains lit in red, but the  
color of the lit button in the B row has changed from amber to red. This  
indicates that both of the video signals selected by the buttons are being  
output to the program video.  
7
Stop the fader lever at the bottom position.  
The landscape video vanishes from the screen, leaving only the lion video.  
This completes the wipe transition.  
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E Bank  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Now, notice again how the buttons in the background A and B rows are lit.  
With the transition complete, the 3rd button from the left in the A row is lit  
in red, and the 2nd button from the left in the B row is lit in amber. This  
means that the signal selections in the A and B rows have been exchanged.  
In other words, the lion video is now selected in the A row, and the  
landscape video is selected in the B row.  
In this state, try moving the fader lever from the bottom to the top. The  
transition takes place in the same direction as last time (from A bus video to  
B bus video), but this time the lion is replaced by the landscape.  
About auto transitions  
An auto transition is executed if, in step 6, you press the [AUTO TRANS]  
button in the transition execution control block instead of moving the fader  
lever.  
The time from the start to the end of the transition is called the “transition rate”  
(unit: frames). The transition rate can be freely set in the range from 0 to 999  
frames.  
See “Setting Transition Rates” (page 69) for more information about how to  
specify transition rates.  
About cut transitions  
A cut transition is executed if, in step 6, you press the [CUT] button in the  
transition execution control block instead of moving the fader lever. In this case,  
the transition type selected in step 4 (effect) and the effect pattern selected in  
step 5 (0024) are ignored.  
46  
Basic Operations (1): Video Switching on the M/E Bank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on the PGM/  
PST Bank — For 1.5 M/E Systems  
If you are using a 1.5 M/E panel or a 1.5 M/E wide panel, you can create the  
program video (final output video) on the PGM/PST bank. You can select  
background video and execute transitions with the same operations as the ones  
used on the M/E bank. You can also take video created on the M/E bank and use  
it as background video.  
This section shows how to take the output of the M/E bank (for example, the lion  
video selected with the 3rd cross-point button from the left) and use it as  
background video. To replace it, we will use the castle video selected with the  
4th cross-point button from the left. As the wipe pattern, we will use pattern  
number 0001, in which the new video gradually moves in from the left side of  
the screen.  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Preparations for operation  
Before starting, move the fader lever in the PGM/PST transition control block  
from one end of its range to the other, and stop it at the top position.  
After finishing the above preparations, proceed as follows.  
1
2
3
5
4
1.5 M/E panel  
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on the PGM/PST Bank — For 1.5 M/E Systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
     
1
In the PGM row of the PGM/PST cross-point control block, press the [M/  
E] button at the right edge.  
The [M/E] button lights in red, and the output video of the M/E bank (the  
lion) is selected as the PGM bus video. At this stage, the 3rd button from the  
left in the background A row on the M/E cross-point control block also  
lights in red.  
2
3
In the PST row, press the 4th button from the left.  
The button lights in amber, and the castle video is selected as PST bus video.  
In the PGM/PST transition control block, press the [WIPE] transition type  
selection button, lighting it.  
Wipe is selected as the transition type.  
4
Select pattern number 0001.  
When you use the Flexi Pad control block, procced as follows.  
1) Press the [PP/ALL] button, lighting it.  
2) Press the [EFF/WIPE] button, lighting it.  
3) Press the [PTN NO.] button, lighting it in green.  
4) With the numeric buttons, enter the digit 1.  
The number that you entered appears in the numeric display.  
5) Press the [ENTR] button.  
Pattern number 0001 is selected.  
5
In the PGM/PST transition control block, slowly move the fader lever  
down. Or, press the [AUTO TRANS] button.  
The wipe transition starts. On the program monitor screen, the video of the  
castle gradually moves in from the left of the video of the lion. When the  
transition completes, the lion video is gone and the castle video occupies the  
entire screen.  
At this stage, the colors of the lit cross-point buttons are as follows.  
• 4th button from the left in the PGM row (selecting the castle video  
signal): Red  
• [M/E] button at the right edge of the PST row (selecting the M/E output  
signal): Amber  
• 3rd button from the left in the background A row on the M/E cross-point  
control block: Amber  
48  
Basic Operations (2): Video Switching on the PGM/PST Bank — For 1.5 M/E Systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Chapter  
Selecting Video  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Select video (page 49)  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Selecting Video  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Selecting Video in the M/E Cross-Point Control Block  
To execute a background video transition, you need to prepare by selecting the  
background video before and after the transition on the M/E cross-point control  
block.  
When using the 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel  
Program video (final output video) is created with the background video  
selected on the PGM/PST cross-point control block.  
See the next section “Selecting Video in the PGM/PST Cross-Point Control  
Block” for more information about how to select video on the PGM/PST cross-  
point control block.  
Select the background video displayed before the transition with the buttons in  
the background A row. Select the background video displayed after the  
transition with the buttons in the background B row.  
The following table shows the correspondences between selectable signals and  
the cross-point buttons used to select them in the factory default configuration.  
Selectable signal  
Cross-point button used to select  
signal  
Internally generated black signal  
BLACK (left edge)  
Internally generated color matte signal COLOR BKGD (right edge)  
Signals input to processor IN1 to IN8  
connectors  
Cross-point buttons other than the above  
a)  
a) IN1 to IN16 when using the 1.5 M/E wide panel.  
Assignments of signals to cross-point buttons can be freely changed using the  
Xpt Assign menu (see page 158).  
To select video, proceed as follows.  
1
2
1 2  
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
1
Press a button in the background A row to select the background video  
before the transition.  
50  
Selecting Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When the button pressed to select background video is lit in red, the video  
is displayed on the video monitor connected to the processor's program  
(final video) output connector.  
2
Press a button in the background B row to select the background video after  
the transition.  
The button lights in amber.  
Selecting Video in the PGM/PST Cross-Point Control Block  
Select the background video before the transition by pressing a button in the  
PGM row. Select the background video after the transition by pressing a button  
in the PST row. Except for the [M/E] buttons at the right edge of the rows, the  
buttons have the same names and select the same signals as the buttons in the  
M/E cross-point control block.  
To import video created in the M/E bank as background video into  
the PGM/PST bank  
Press the [M/E] button at the right edge of either row (PGM row or PST row).  
Selecting Video in the AUX Bus Control Block  
In the AUX bus control block, you can use the AUX delegation buttons to assign  
the cross-point button row to the desired bus, allowing you to select key signals  
and signals to apply a variety of other functions.  
The buses which can be selected by the AUX delegation buttons are as follows.  
Button  
Selectable bus  
AUX1 to 4 AUX1 bus to AUX4 bus  
EDIT PVW Edit Pvw (edit preview) bus  
UTIL  
Utility bus  
KEY1  
[SRC BUS] button off: Key1 bus  
[SRC BUS] button on: Key1 Source bus  
KEY2  
DSK1  
DSK2  
[SRC BUS] button off: Key2 bus  
[SRC BUS] button on: Key2 Source bus  
[SRC BUS] button off: DSK1 (downstream key 1) bus  
[SRC BUS] button on: DSK1 Source (downstream key 1 source) bus  
[SRC BUS] button off: DSK2 (downstream key 2) bus  
[SRC BUS] button on: DSK2 Source (downstream key 2 source) bus  
CCR1,  
CCR2  
CCR1 (color correction1) bus, CCR2 bus  
FRAME  
MEM  
[SRC BUS] button off: Frame Memory Video bus  
[SRC BUS] button on: Frame Memory Key bus  
For more information about the buttons in the AUX bus control block, see “AUX  
To select signals in the AUX bus control block, proceed as follows.  
Selecting Video  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1 2  
1 2  
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
1
2
Press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus to which the  
cross-point button row is assigned.  
Press one of the buttons in cross-point button row to select the desired  
signal.  
When a signal on the selected bus is being output to program video, the  
corresponding button lights in red (high tally). Otherwise the button lights  
in amber (low tally).  
To select the background of a 2-channel effect  
In some of the effect patterns from number 2001 to number 2999, utility bus  
signals are used as the background for the A bus and B bus video.  
For such effect patterns, first press the AUX delegation button [UTIL] and then  
press a button in the cross-point button row to select the signal to input to the  
utility bus.  
52  
Selecting Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Transition Types  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
Select video (page 49)  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Selecting Transition Types  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Selecting the Transition Type and the Next Transition  
Next transition  
selection buttons  
Next transition selection buttons  
Transition type selection buttons  
Transition type selection  
buttons (for M/E bank)  
Transition type selection buttons  
(for PGM/PST bank)  
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
To select the transition type  
Press one of the transition type selection buttons in the M/E transition control  
block or the PGM/PST transition control block, lighting the button.  
MIX: The new video overlaps the current video, finally replacing it.  
EFF: A transition using an effect pattern is executed.  
(In the PGM/PST bank, this button is [WIPE].)  
PST COLOR MIX: This is a two-stage mix (dissolve), comprising two  
transitions. In the first transition, a color matte (non-patterned color signal)  
is gradually mixed into the current video. In the second transition, the new  
video is gradually mixed into the color matte.  
When this is selected, you can use the following procedure to select the  
matte color.  
To select a color matte for preset color mix  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.  
The Transition menu appears.  
54  
Selecting Transition Types  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2
Select the target of the setting.  
• Press [M/E Pst Col] to select a color matte for the M/E bank.  
• Press [P/P Pst Col] to select a color matte for the PGM/PST bank (1.5M/  
E panel only).  
A popup window appears, displaying the same 8 colors as a color bar.  
3
4
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.  
The popup window closes.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
To select the next transition  
Select the part of the video which changes in the transition.  
Press one of the next transition selection buttons in the M/E transition control  
block, lighting the button.  
(This operation is not needed for a transition in the PGM/PST bank, since only  
the background changes.)  
BKGD: The background changes.  
KEY1: Insert or delete key 1.  
KEY2: Insert or delete key 2.  
KEY PRIOR: Reverse the priority of key 1 and key 2.  
working with keys.  
Note  
When using effect patterns numbered 1001 or higher (see page 60), it is not  
possible to make multiple next transition selections. Also the [KEY PRIOR]  
button cannot be selected.  
Selecting Transition Types  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting Effects  
When you have selected [EFF] as the transition type (see page 54) or selected  
[WIPE] (in the PGM/PST bank of the 1.5M/E panel), select the effect to use.  
Effects selectable in the PGM/PST bank are limited to basic wipes. The M/E  
bank can select basic wipes and other effects as well. This section refers to all  
of these together as simply “effects.”  
For more information about effects, see “Effect Types” (page 60).  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
Select video (page 49)  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
You can select effects using either the Flexi Pad control block or menus.  
56  
Selecting Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Selecting Effects With the Flexi Pad Control Block  
2
1
4
2
1
4
3
5
3
5
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
1
Press the [EFF/WIPE] button in the Flexi Pad control block.  
7
4
8
5
2
9
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
6
3
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
1
STORE  
MCRO  
PTN  
NO.  
10  
ENTR  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
2
3
Select the setting target with the delegation buttons.  
• To set the M/E bank, press the [M/E] button.  
• To set the PGM/PST bank, press the [PP/ALL] button (when using a 1.5  
M/E panel).  
Press the [PTN NO.] button, lighting it in green.  
(The [PTN NO.] button lights alternately in green and orange each time it is  
pressed.)  
An effect number can be entered now.  
4
Enter the number of the desired effect pattern.  
If the number begins by 0, 00, or 000, it is needless to input these zeros. For  
example, when the number is 0001, input the digit 1 only.  
Wipe pratterns selectable in the PGM/PST bank are limited to 0001 to 0024,  
0901, and 0902.  
Selecting Effects  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Refer to “Effect Pattern List” in the Appendix (separate document) for more  
information about effect patterns.  
The entered effect pattern number appears in the numeric display.  
Note  
Effects numbered 1001 and higher cannot be used when:  
• Multiple next transition selections have been made.  
• Key priority (KEY PRIOR) has been selected as the transition type.  
To re-enter the pattern number  
Press the [PTN NO.] button so that it changes back to lit in orange, then  
repeat the procedure from step 3.  
5
Press the [ENTR] button.  
This confirms the effect pattern number entered in step 4.  
When an invalid pattern number is entered  
A warning tone sounds and the system exits pattern number input mode.  
Check the correct pattern number and repeat from step 3.  
Selecting Effects From Menus  
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.  
The Main menu appears.  
(The example in the above figure shows effect pattern 0002 selected. See  
page 61 for an example of the screen when a pattern numbered 1001 or  
higher is selected.)  
2
Press [Pattern].  
A popup window appears.  
58  
Selecting Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To scroll the popup window  
Do one of the following.  
• Use the scroll bar on the right.  
• Rotate knob 1. Each rotation scrolls 1 line up or down.  
• Press [Page Down] or [Page Up]. Each press scrolls 3 lines up or down.  
3
To select the desired pattern from a group of patterns, press [Group Select].  
A popup window appears.  
4
Select the name of the desired group.  
The effect patterns in the selected group appear.  
(The example in the following figure shows the Enhanced group.)  
Selecting Effects  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Press the button for the desired pattern.  
The effect pattern is confirmed, the popup window closes, and you are  
returned to the Main menu.  
Effect Types  
About effect pattern numbers  
The effects available on this system can be selected with 4-digit effect pattern  
numbers. These numbers can generally be classified as shown below. In general  
this manual calls all effects simply as “effects,” but when it refers to effects used  
on the PGM/PST bank, it calls them as “wipes.”  
Yes: Available for use No: Not available for use  
Type  
Effect  
pattern  
numbers  
M/E  
PGM/PST  
Wipes  
0001 to 0661 Yes  
Standard group patterns  
only (0001 to 0024)  
NAM  
0901  
0902  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Super mix  
a)  
a)  
Effects using 1-channel effects 1001 to 1999  
DME  
Yes  
Yes  
2-channel effects 2001 to 2999  
No  
a) DME option must be installed.  
Note  
Effects numbered 1001 and higher cannot be used when:  
• Multiple next transition selections have been made.  
• Key priority ([KEY PRIOR]) has been selected as the transition type.  
Transition effects and non-transition effects  
Effects numbered 1001 and higher fall into the following two types, depending  
on what occurs when the effect is executed.  
Transition effects (slides, page turn, etc.): A bus and B bus cross-points are  
switched by executing a transition. Also, when border, cropping, or other  
1)  
modifications have been added, they disappear as soon as the transition  
ends.  
1) Modifications listed in “Effect Pattern Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
60  
Selecting Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Note  
When you add a shadow or trail to an effect applied to a key and then execute  
the transition, the shadow or trail disappears instantly as soon as the  
transition ends.  
Non-transition effects (picture-in-picture, etc.): A bus and B bus cross-points  
are not switched, even after the effect ends. Also, when border, cropping, or  
1)  
other modifications have been added, they do not disappear, even after the  
transition ends.  
1) Modifications listed in “Effect Pattern Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Selecting Channels  
When an effect pattern numbered 2001 or higher is selected, you need to select  
the operating channels.  
To select channels with the Effect/Wipe control block  
Press the [M/E 1CH] or [M/E 2CH] delegation selection button in the Effect/  
Wipe control block, lighting the button. You can also select both channels.  
To select channels from menus  
Note  
Two channels cannot be selected at once from a menu.  
However, when two channels are selected with the buttons in the Effect/Wipe  
control block, both of the buttons are lit in the menu.  
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.  
The Main menu appears.  
2
Press [M/E 1ch] or [M/E 2ch] to select a channel.  
If two channels are selected with the delegation selection buttons in the  
effect/wipe control block of the control panel, the parameter setting values  
for the reference channel are shown in the menu. Settings for the two  
channels are adjusted with relative values.  
Setting the parameters of 2-channel effects  
Parameters which can be set individually for each channel  
• Size and position of the effect pattern (Position), and border color of the effect  
pattern (Border Color)  
• Brightness of beveled edges (Light mode), direction of light source (Light  
mode/Color mode), color (Color mode), softness of edges (Edge Soft)  
• Adjustment of crop picture frame (Crop)  
Selecting Effects  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Note  
Among the parameters listed above, the following parameters are exceptions.  
For the indicated effects, they are set for both channels.  
• Position of the Ripple (2ch) effect  
• Crop of the Page Roll (2ch) effect  
• Crop of the Page Turn (2ch) effect  
Parameters common to both channels  
Parameters other than the above are set for both channel 1 and channel 2, even  
if only one of the channels has been selected with the [M/E 1CH] and [M/E  
2CH] delegation selection buttons.  
62  
Selecting Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns  
You can change the position of effect patterns (see following figure) and change  
their size.  
Position: Off  
Position: On  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
Select video (page 49)  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Changing Pattern Position and Size With the Joystick  
CTR button  
1
2
CTR button  
1
2
1 M/E panel  
1.5 M/E panel  
1
2
Press the [POS] button in the Effect/Wipe control block, lighting it.  
The joystick is assigned to the positioner (which changes effect pattern  
position and size).  
For a 2-channel effect, select the channel or channels for which you want to  
(You can set the parameters for the individual channels.)  
3
Operate the joystick as shown below, depending on what you want to  
change.  
Joystick direction  
X (H Position)  
Description  
Setting values  
Horizontal position  
Vertical position  
Effect pattern size  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
Y (V Position)  
a)  
Knob (Size)  
a) Not available for some patterns. For details, refer to “Effect Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix (separate document).  
To return the pattern size and position to their default  
Press the [CTR] button in the Effect/Wipe control block.  
Changing Pattern Size and Position From Menus  
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.  
The Main menu appears.  
64  
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2
3
Press [Position], turning it on.  
For a 2-channel effect, select the channel or channels for which you want to  
(You can set the parameters for the individual channels.)  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
4
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
b)  
1 (H Position)  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2 (V Position)  
Vertical position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
c)  
Effect pattern size  
3 (Size)  
a) –100.00 moves the center of the pattern to the left edge, and +100.00 moves it to the right edge.  
b) –100.00 moves the center of the pattern to the bottom edge, and +100.00 moves it to the top edge.  
c) Not available for some patterns. For details, refer to “Effect Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix (separate document).  
To return the pattern to the center of the screen in a transition  
(effect pattern nos. 0001 to 0999 only)  
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu, press [Auto Center], turning it on.  
Changing the Position and Size of Effect Patterns  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying Video Borders  
You can add borders to the edges of the video, and soften the borders or edges  
(see following figure).  
s
Border: On  
Soft: On  
Border: On  
Soft: Off  
Border: Off  
Soft: On  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Select video (page 49)  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
66  
Modifying Video Borders  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Adding Borders to Video  
SOFT button  
2
1
SOFT button  
2
1
1 M/E panel  
1.5 M/E panel  
1
2
Press the [BORD] button in the Effect/Wipe control block, lighting it.  
Or, turn [Border] on in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu (see page  
58).  
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Width)  
Width of border  
0.00 to 100.00  
To set border colors  
1
2
For a 2-channel effect, in the Effect >Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu (see  
page 61), select the channel or channels for which you want to make  
settings.  
(You can set parameters for the individual channels.)  
Note that for effects other than 2-channel effects, it is not necessary to carry  
out channel selection. Begin with step 2.  
Press [Border Color].  
A popup window appears, displaying the same 8 colors as a color bar.  
3
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.  
Modifying Video Borders  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The popup window closes.  
4
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
Softening Video Edges (Soft Edge/Soft Border)  
1
2
Press the [SOFT] button in the Effect/Wipe control block, lighting it.  
Or, turn [Soft] on in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
No borders:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Soft)  
Softness of edges  
0.00 to 100.00  
Borders:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 (Width)  
2 (Inner Soft)  
Width of borders  
Softness of border inner side  
a)  
3 (Outer Soft) Softness of border outer side  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) Not displayed for effect patterns nos.1001 to 2999.  
68  
Modifying Video Borders  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Preparing Transitions  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Select video (page 49)  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Setting Transition Rates  
For a transition which is executed automatically over a specified duration, you  
need to set the duration (transition rate).  
To set transition rates, you can use either the Flexi Pad control block or menus.  
Preparing Transitions  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To set transition rates with the Flexi Pad control block  
2
3,4  
2
3,4  
Transition rate display  
Transition rate display  
1.5 M/E panel  
1
1
1 M/E panel  
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [TRANS RATE] mode selection  
button, lighting it.  
The Flexi Pad control block enters transition rate input mode.  
Select the target of the setting with the delegation selection buttons.  
• Press [M/E] to set for the M/E bank.  
• Press [PP/ALL] to set for the PGM/PST bank (when using the 1.5M/E  
panel).  
3
4
Enter the transition rate as a number of frames. (The setting range is 0 to  
999.)  
Press the [ENTR] button.  
This confirms the input. The transition rate appears beneath the fader lever  
in the transition control block.  
To set transition rates from menus  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.  
The Transition menu appears.  
70  
Preparing Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
3
Select the target of the setting.  
• Press [M/E] to set for the M/E bank.  
• Press [P/P] to set for the PGM/PST bank (when using the 1.5M/E panel).  
The numeric keypad window appears.  
Enter a number of frames in the range 0 to 999 and press [Enter].  
This confirms the input. The transition rate appears beneath the fader lever  
in the transition control block.  
Selecting Effect Directions  
You can select the direction of some effects.  
The normal direction is the direction of the arrows shown in the illustrations of  
effect patterns in the “Effect Pattern List” in the Appendix (separate document).  
The reverse direction is the opposite direction.  
s
Reverse direction  
Normal direction  
To select effect directions, you can use either the Effect/Wipe control block or  
menus.  
Preparing Transitions  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To select effect directions with the Effect/Wipe control block  
N/R button  
REV button  
N/R button  
REV button  
1 M/E panel  
1.5 M/E panel  
To select the normal direction: Turn both the [REV] button and [N/R] button  
off, so that they are not lit.  
To select the reverse direction: Press the [REV] button so that it lights, and the  
[N/R] button so that it is not lit.  
To select the normal/reverse direction: Press the [N/R] button so that it lights .  
To select effect directions from menus  
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main.  
The Main menu appears.  
2
Select one of the following.  
To select the normal direction: Turn both [Norm/Rev] and [Reverse] off.  
To select the reverse direction: Turn [Reverse] on, and turn [Norm/Rev]  
off.  
To select the normal/reverse direction: Turn [Norm/Rev] on.  
72  
Preparing Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Executing Transitions  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
Select video (page 49)  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Executing Transitions  
Execute transition with the buttons and levers shown in the following figure.  
Executing Transitions  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Fader lever  
AUTO TRANS button  
CUT button  
Fader lever  
CUT button  
Fader lever  
CUT button  
AUTO TRANS button  
AUTO TRANS button  
1 M/E panel  
1.5 M/E panel  
Note  
When modifications (Position, Aspect, and so on) have been applied to effects,  
the video may not switch smoothly, and afterimages may remain visible even  
after transitions have finished executing.  
To switch the video instantly ([CUT] button)  
Press the [CUT] button in the transition execution section.  
The video switches between the A bus and the B bus with each press of the  
button.  
To execute a transition at a specified transition rate ([AUTO TRANS] button)  
Press the [AUTO TRANS] button in the transition execution section.  
The progress of the transition is shown by the transition indicator LEDs, which  
light one after the other as the transition proceeds.  
To execute a transition with the fader lever  
Move the transition lever from one side to the other at any speed. Once you do  
this, you can control the transition manually.  
The transition indicator LEDs light one after the other as you move the lever to  
execute the transition.  
About fader lever non-sync  
If an auto transition finishes with the fader lever in an intermediate position, the  
lever position does not match the current transition position. This state is called  
“non-sync.”  
Two of the transition indicator LEDs light to indicate a non-sync state, either at  
the top of the lever range, at the bottom of the range, or at both sides.  
74  
Executing Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Moving the lever toward the side where LEDs are lit does not execute a  
transition. However, the non-sync state is released when the lever reaches the  
edge of its range, enabling you to execute a transition with the next operation.  
• Moving the lever toward the side where LEDs are not lit executes a transition  
across the remaining lever range.  
An auto transition is possible even if the fader lever is in a non-sync state. When  
you press the [AUTO TRANS] button, the transition indicator LEDs light as  
always to show the progress of the transition. But when the transition finishes,  
two of the LEDs light to indicate the non-sync state.  
Executing Transitions  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Composing Video With Keys  
A key is an effect in which color and shape information is used to cut out part  
of the background video and replace it with another color or other video. The  
signal determining how the background is cut out is termed the “key source,”  
and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is termed the “key fill.”  
This system supports the following types of keys.  
Luminance key/linear key: Used to insert titles and logos into the video. The  
key source often shows black and white text, which is detected by using the  
luminance (Y) signal.  
Chroma key: Used to compose scenes with two different components, for  
example people and a background. A key signal based on a particular color  
is used to cut out the background.  
Pattern key: Video is composed using various patterns. A special pattern is  
used as the key source.  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
Select video (page 49)  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
76  
Composing Video With Keys  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
M/E Keys and Downstream Keys  
Two keys each are available on the M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank. The M/  
E bank keys are called key 1 and key 2, and the PGM/PST bank keys are called  
downstream key 1 and downstream key 2.  
The downstream keys are also abbreviated as DSK1 and DSK2.  
Inserting Text With a Luminance Key or Linear Key  
Key 1 or downstream key 1 (DSK1)  
Transition  
Key 2 or downstream key 2 (DSK2)  
A linear key is a type of luminance key, but with less variation in gain, allowing  
more precise adjustment.  
The following procedure shows how to set up key 1 on the M/E bank. The same  
operations can be used with the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream keys  
1 and 2).  
To select luminance or linear key and set the key parameters  
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Main.  
The Main menu appears.  
2
Press [Key Type].  
A popup window appears.  
Composing Video With Keys  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
3
4
To select a luminance key, press [Luminance]. To select a linear key, press  
[Linear].  
The popup window closes.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Clip)  
Reference level for key signal generation +109.59 to –7.31  
2 (Gain)  
3 (Density)  
4 (Filter)  
Gain of key  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Density of key  
Filter coefficient  
a)  
1 to 9  
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter becomes stronger as larger  
numbers are specified.  
To select a key source  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Key Source].  
A popup window appears.  
2
3
Press one of the following to select the signal to be used as key source.  
Self: Select the same signal as key fill.  
Auto Select: Automatically select the key signal assigned to a cross-point  
button together with the key fill bus signal as a pair. (Use the Video/Key  
Pair Assign menu (see page 159) to carry out pair assignments.)  
Split: Aside from the key source signal selected automatically in Auto  
Select mode, another key source may be selected independently. If you  
select this, proceed to step 3 and select the key source.  
If you selected “Split” in step 2, press the [KEY1] button and the [SRC  
BUS] button in the AUX bus control block, lighting both buttons, and select  
a key source in the cross-point button row. The state of the [KEY] button  
determines whether the key side or the video side is selected. (See the  
following figure.)  
• When you light the [SRC BUS] button, the [KEY] button also lights,  
enabling you to select the key side signal assigned as the key source to the  
pair number.  
• Pressing the [KEY] button to turn it off enables you to select the video  
side signal assigned as the key source to the pair number.  
78  
Composing Video With Keys  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
KEY1 button  
SRC BUS button (lit)  
KEY button  
KEY1 button  
SRC BUS button (lit)  
KEY button  
Cross-point button row  
Cross-point button row  
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
To select a key fill  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Key Fill].  
A popup window appears.  
2
3
Press one of the following.  
Key Bus: Key fill bus signal selected in the AUX bus control block.  
Matte: Signal generated by internal color matte signal generator. When this  
is selected, you can select the matte color as explained in the next  
section “To adjust the key fill color.”  
If you selected “Key Bus” in step 2, first press the [KEY1] button in the  
AUX bus control block, lighting it, then press the [SRC BUS] button,  
extinguishing it, and finally select the key fill from the cross-point button  
row. (See the following figure.)  
Composing Video With Keys  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
KEY1 button  
SRC BUS button (not lit)  
KEY1 button  
SRC BUS button (not lit)  
Cross-point button row  
Cross-point button row  
1 M/E panel  
1.5 M/E panel  
To adjust the key fill color  
When you select “Matte” as the key fill, you can obtain the desired color with  
the following procedure.  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Fill Color].  
A popup window appears, displaying the same eight colors as a color bar.  
2
3
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.  
The popup window closes.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
To insert and delete keys  
Use transitions to insert keys into background video and to delete keys from  
background video.  
80  
Composing Video With Keys  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For more information about key transitions, see “To select the next transition”  
Composing Video With Chroma Keys  
Key source/key fill  
Background video  
Chroma key video  
To select chroma key  
The following procedure shows how to set up key 1 on the M/E bank. The same  
operations can be used to set up the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream  
keys 1 and 2).  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Key Type].  
A popup window appears (see page 77).  
Press [Chroma].  
To select a chroma key source  
To select a chroma key fill  
Refer to step 1 in “To select a key source” (page 78) in the procedure for  
luminance and linear keys.  
Referring to the procedure for luminance and linear keys in “To select a key fill”  
(page 79), set the key fill to “Key Bus,” and select the key fill with the cross-  
point buttons.  
To adjust auto chroma key  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Auto CRK],  
turning it on.  
A square frame sample mark appears in the external monitor screen. Also,  
the key source is set automatically to “Self.”  
Adjust the following parameters so that the chroma key reference color  
(typically blue) is seen within the sample mark.  
Composing Video With Keys  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1 (H Position) Move the sample mark horizontally.  
2 (V Position) Move the sample mark vertically.  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
3 (Size)  
Adjust the size of the sample mark. 1.00 to 100.00  
a) The setting range varies depending on the signal format, and screen aspect and size settings.  
3
Press [Auto Start].  
Auto chroma key is executed on the basis of the color inside the sample  
mark, and chroma key video is output to the monitor screen.  
[Auto CRK] is turned off automatically.  
To adjust chroma key video  
1
2
In the Main menu (see page 77), press [Key Type].  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Clip)  
2 (Gain)  
3 (Hue)  
Reference level for key signal generation 0.00 to 100.00  
Gain of key  
Hue  
–100.00 to +100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
4 (Density) Density of key  
5 (Filter) Filter coefficient  
a)  
1 to 9  
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter becomes stronger as larger  
numbers are specified.  
To make finer adjustments, see “Adjusting Chroma Keys” (page 106).  
Composing Video With Pattern Keys  
To select pattern key and set the key parameters  
The following procedure shows how to set up key1 on the M/E bank. The same  
operations can be used to set up the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream  
keys 1 and 2).  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Key Type].  
A popup window appears (see page 77).  
2
3
Press [Pattern].  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 (Size)  
2 (Soft)  
Size of pattern  
Softness of edges  
Density of key  
Pattern number  
3 (Density)  
4 (Pattern)  
a)  
1 to 24  
a) Same as standard wipes.  
82  
Composing Video With Keys  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About the pattern key source  
In the pattern key, a wipe pattern is selected automatically as the key source. No  
user operation is required.  
To select the key fill for a pattern key  
As the key fill, “Key Bus” and “Matte” can be selected. (See “To select a key  
fill” (page 79)).  
To transform the pattern used in a pattern key  
Adding Borders to Keys  
Normal  
Border  
Drop border  
Drop shadow  
Outline  
The following procedure shows how to add borders to key1 on the M/E bank.  
The same operations can be used to add borders to the other keys as well (key  
2, and downstream keys 1 and 2).  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Edge].  
A popup window appears.  
2
Press one of the following.  
Normal: Do not add anything to the edges.  
Border: Add a border to the edges.  
Drop Border: Add a drop border to the edges.  
Shadow: Add a shadow to the edges.  
Outline: Add an outline to the edges.  
Composing Video With Keys  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
The popup window closes.  
3
Set the following parameters, depending on what you selected in step 2.  
When Border or Outline was selected (with the separate edge function  
(see page 105) being off):  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
b)  
1 (Width)  
Width  
0 to 8 (0.00 to 100.00)  
2 (Density)  
Density  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) 0 to 4 in 4H mode or when fine key (see page 105) is on.  
b) When pattern key is selected as the key type.  
When Border or Outline was selected (with the separate edge function  
(see page 105) being on):  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Left)  
Left edge position  
0 to 8  
a)  
2 (Right)  
3 (Top)  
Right edge position  
Top edge position  
0 to 8  
a)  
0 to 8  
a)  
4 (Bottom)  
Bottom edge  
position  
0 to 8  
5 (Density)  
Key density  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) 0 to 4 in 4H mode or when fine key (see page 105) is on.  
When Drop Border or Shadow was selected:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Width)  
Width  
0 to 8  
b)  
2 (Position)  
3 (Density)  
Position  
Density  
1 to 3  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) 0 to 4 in 4H mode or when fine key (see page 105) is on.  
b) 1 to 8 when fine key (see page 105) is on.  
To add color to the key edges  
1
2
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Main, and press [Edge Color].  
A popup window appears.  
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color, and adjust  
the parameters with the knobs.  
Masking Part of a Key  
A mask is used to cover part of the video with background or a key. This allows  
you to correct for unwanted holes in the background or a key that is not cut out  
in the desired way.  
84  
Composing Video With Keys  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key mask  
Background mask  
Masked area  
(box)  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main menu (see page 77), press [Mask].  
A popup window appears.  
Press one of the following.  
Off: Do not mask.  
Key Mask: This masks out a part of the key, which will result in the  
background appearing.  
Bkgd Mask: This masks out a part of the background, which will result in  
the key fill appearing.  
The popup window closes.  
To make detailed mask settings, see “Setting Key Mask Shapes and  
Moving a Key Over or Under  
To check whether a key is over or under  
There are OVER indicators in the M/E transition control block, located over  
key1 and key2. The key whose OVER indicator is lit is the key on top.  
To move a key over or under from menus  
The following procedure shows how to move key1 on the M/E bank. The same  
operations can be used to move the other keys as well (key 2, and downstream  
keys 1 and 2).  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Main meu (see page 77), press [Key Priority].  
A popup window appears.  
Composing Video With Keys  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Press one of the following.  
Over: The target key is moved to over.  
Under: The target key is moved to under.  
To move keys over and under in a transition  
There is a [KEY PRIOR] button in the M/E transition control block.  
Execute a transition after lighting this button as the next transition (see page 55).  
The over/under relationship of key 1 and key 2 is reversed.  
Inserting and Deleting Keys Only  
To insert or delete a key by mixing (independent key transition)  
1,2  
1,2  
1
1
3
3
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
The following procedure shows how to set up downstream key 1. The same  
operations can be used to set up the other keys as well (M/E keys 1 and 2, and  
downstream key 2).  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.  
The Transition menu appears (see page 54).  
2
3
After pressing [DSK1], enter the key's transition rate in the numeric keypad  
In the downstream key/fade to black control block, press the [AUTO  
TRANS] button for DSK1.  
Downstream key 1 is inserted, mixing into the background. If downstream  
key 1 is already inserted, it is deleted.  
To insert or delete keys instantly  
To insert or delete downstream keys instantly  
In the downstream key/fade to black control block, press the [DSK1 ON] button  
or the [DSK2 ON] button.  
86  
Composing Video With Keys  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To insert or delete M/E keys instantly  
If you are using the 1.5M/E panel, press the [KEY1 ON] button or the [KEY2  
ON] button in the M/E key transition control block.  
If you are using the 1 M/E panel, press the [KEY1 ON] button or the [KEY2  
ON] button in the M/E transition control block.  
Composing Video With Keys  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Internally Generated Signals  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Select video (page 49)  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Using a Color Background  
The term “color background” refers to a signal generated by the processor’s  
internal color generator. The color can be either monotone or composed from  
two colors.  
88  
Using Internally Generated Signals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Color background (single-color)  
To set color 1  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd.  
The Color Bkgd menu appears.  
The [Color1] button shows the current color.  
2
Press [Color1].  
A popup window appears.  
3
4
Press the button for the color that is closest to the desired color.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
To compose a pattern of two colors (color mix)  
Color 1  
Color 2  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Mix Color],  
turning it on.  
Using Internally Generated Signals  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Compose the pattern by using the knobs to set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 (Size)  
2 (Soft)  
3 (Pattern)  
Size of pattern  
Softness of edges  
Pattern number  
a)  
1 to 24  
a) Same as patterns in the standard group.  
3
4
Press [Color1]. In the popup window which appears, press the button for the  
color that is closest to the desired color. Then set the parameters with the  
knobs. (See steps 3 and 4 of “To set color 1” (page 89)).  
Press [Color2] and repeat the procedure.  
To transform color mix patterns  
To set the pattern position  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Position], turning  
it on.  
2
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1 (H Position)  
Move the pattern horizontally  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2 (V Position)  
Move the pattern vertically  
a) Minus values move the pattern to the left, and plus values move it to the right. At –100.00 the  
horizontal center is at the left edge of the screen. At +100.00, it is at the right edge.  
b) Minus values move the pattern down, and plus values move it up. At –100.00 the vertical center  
is at the bottom edge of the screen. At +100.00, it is at the top edge.  
To arrange multiple examples of the same pattern  
1
2
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Multi], turning it  
on.  
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (H Multi)  
Number of patterns arranged  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2 (V Multi)  
Number of patterns arranged  
vertically  
1 to 63  
3 (Invert Type) How patterns are arranged  
1 to 4 (see figure below)  
90  
Using Internally Generated Signals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the aspect ratio of a pattern  
1
2
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Aspect], turning  
it on.  
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Aspect)  
Aspect ratio of pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) Minus values make the pattern taller, and plus values make the pattern longer.  
To rotate an effect pattern  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Rotation].  
A popup window appears.  
2
3
Press [Angle].  
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Angle)  
Angle of pattern slant  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) –100.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one rotation in the  
clockwise direction.  
To rotate an effect pattern at a specified speed  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Rotation].  
A popup window appears.  
2
3
Press [Speed].  
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Speed)  
Speed of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) –100.00 is one rotation per second in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one rotation  
per second in the clockwise direction.  
To modulate an effect pattern  
Note  
The shape of the modulation wave is fixed as a sin wave.  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [H Modulation] or  
[V Modulation], turning it on.  
Using Internally Generated Signals  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H Modulation gives horizontal modulation, and V Modulation gives  
vertical modulation.  
2
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 (Amplitude)  
2 (Frequency)  
3 (Speed)  
Amplitude of modulation wave  
Frequency of modulation wave  
Speed of modulation  
a)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) In H Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the left direction and +100.00 in the right  
direction.  
In V Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the downward direction and +100.00 in the  
upward direction.  
To exchange color 1 and color 2  
From the top menu, select Misc >Color Bkgd, then press [Color Invert], turning  
it on.  
The data for color 1 and color 2 are exchanged.  
92  
Using Internally Generated Signals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fading the Video to Black  
Fade to black gradually darkens the overall video image, until it is completely  
black.  
Flow of Operations  
The following figure shows a typical flow of operations when using the MFS-  
2000 system. For details about operations, see the pages in parentheses ( ).  
Basic operations  
Advanced operations  
: Always done  
: Done as required  
Select video (page 49)  
: Done at this stage  
Select the transition type (page 53)  
Select an effect (page 56)  
a) Some patterns cannot be modified in  
this way. For details, refer to “Effect  
Pattern Transformations and  
Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Select the operating channels (page 61)  
When mix or  
preset color mix  
is selected  
Change the position and size of the effect pattern (page 63) a)  
Advanced effect operations (page 95) a)  
Modify the video border (page 66) a)  
Prepare the transition (page 69)  
Advanced key operations (page 104)  
Execute the transition (page 73)  
Compose video by keying (page 76)  
Color correction (page 111)  
Frame memory (page 119)  
Snapshots (page 124)  
Use internally generated signals (page 88)  
Safe title (page 134)  
Fade out to black (page 93)  
Fading the Video to Black  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1,2  
1,2  
1
1
3
3
1.5 M/E panel  
1 M/E panel  
To fade out the video with fade to black  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Transition.  
The Transition menu appears.  
2
3
After pressing [FTB], enter a transition rate in the numeric keypad window.  
In the downstream key/fade to black control block, press the [FTB] button.  
The [FTB] button lights, and the fade to black begins. When it finishes, the  
picture is completely black.  
To stop the fade to black and return to the state before it started, press the  
button again.  
To return to the original video from a black screen  
Press the [FTB] button again.  
94  
Fading the Video to Black  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operations  
Chapter  
Advanced Effect  
Operations  
The procedures in this section mainly show how to operate  
with M/E effects (effects used on the M/E bank). The same  
procedures can also be used with PGM/PST wipes (wipes  
used on the PGM/PST bank).  
Transforming Effect Patterns  
2
3
Press [Aspect], turning it on.  
Note that some effect patterns cannot be transformed.  
Set the aspect ratio parameter with knob 1.  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern  
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Aspect) Aspect ratio of  
pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
To change the aspect ratio of an effect  
pattern (Aspect)  
a) Minus values make the pattern taller, and plus values make the  
pattern longer.  
To rotate an effect pattern (Rotation)  
Aspect: On  
Aspect: Off  
Rotation (Angle): On  
Rotation: Off  
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect  
>Modify (Ptn 1-999).  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.  
0001-0999) menu (see previous section), press  
[Rotation].  
The Modify (Ptn No.0001-0999) menu appears.  
A popup window appears.  
Advanced Effect Operations  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
1
2
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.  
0001-0999) menu (see page 95), turn one or both of  
the following on.  
H Modulation: Modulate horizontally.  
V Modulation: Modulate vertically.  
Set the parameters with the knobs.  
2
3
Set the following as required.  
Knob  
1 (Amplitude) Amplitude of  
modulation wave  
Description  
Setting values  
Angle: Slant the pattern at a specified angle.  
Speed: Rotate the pattern at a specified speed.  
Magnitude: Rotate the pattern to a specified angle  
during the transition.  
0.00 to 100.00  
2 (Frequency) Frequency of  
modulation wave  
0.00 to 100.00  
a)  
3 (Speed)  
Speed of  
modulation  
Set the following parameters according to the selection  
in step 2.  
–100.00 to +100.00  
b)  
4 (Shape)  
Shape of  
modulation wave  
1 to 3  
When Angle was selected:  
a) In H Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the left direction  
and +100.00 in the right direction.  
In V Modulation, maximum speed is at –100.00 in the downward  
direction and +100.00 in the upward direction.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Angle)  
Angle of pattern  
slant  
–100.00 to +100.00  
b) 1: Sine wave, 2: Triangular wave, 3: Rectangular wave  
a) –100.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and  
+100.00 is one rotation in the clockwise direction. 0.00 is no rotation.  
To arrange several examples of the same  
effect pattern (Multi)  
When Speed was selected:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.  
0001-0999) menu (see page 95), press [Multi], turning  
it on.  
a)  
1 (Speed)  
Speed of pattern  
rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) –100.00 is one rotation per second in the counterclockwise direction,  
and +100.00 is one rotation per second in the clockwise direction.  
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
When Magnitude was selected:  
For an M/E effect:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
b)  
1 (Angle)  
Angle of pattern  
slant  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1 (H Multi)  
Number of  
patterns  
arranged  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2 (Magnitude) Magnitude of  
rotation during  
–200.00 to +200.00  
transition  
2 (V Multi)  
3 (Shift)  
Number of  
patterns  
arranged  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a) –100.00 is one rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and  
+100.00 is one rotation in the clockwise direction. 0.00 is no rotation.  
b) –200.00 is two rotations in the counterclockwise direction, and  
+200.00 is two rotations in the clockwise direction. 0.00 is no  
rotation.  
a)  
Amount of  
–100.00 to +100.00  
horizontal shift of  
patterns in even  
numbered rows  
To modulate effect patterns (H/V  
Modulation)  
This procedure is supported only for M/E effects.  
a) Minus values shift to the left, and plus values shift to the right.  
For a PGM/PST wipe:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (H Multi)  
Number of patterns 1 to 63  
arranged  
horizontally  
2 (V Multi)  
Number of patterns 1 to 63  
arranged vertically  
Modulation H: On  
Modulation V: On  
96  
Advanced Effect Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
3 (Invert Type) Replication layout  
1 to 4 (see the  
following figure)  
Crop: On  
Crop: Off  
1
Press the [CROP] button in the Effect/Wipe control  
block, turning it on.  
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Crop menu, turn  
[Crop] on.  
1: All patterns point in same direction  
2: Even numbered rows move in horizontal direction  
3: Even numbered columns and rows are inverted  
4: Even numbered columns and rows are inverted, and even numbered  
rows move in horizontal direction  
3
For an M/E effect, do the following to invert the  
direction of every other pattern.  
• To invert every other pattern in the horizontal  
direction, press [H Invert].  
• To invert every other pattern in the vertical  
direction, press [V Invert].  
To mix in a diamond dust effect (Dust Mix)  
This procedure is supported only for M/E effects.  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Modify (Ptn No.  
0001-0999) menu (see page 95), press [Dust Mix],  
turning it on.  
2
3
Select the operating channels. (See “Selecting  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Left)  
Crop left side of  
image.  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1 (Mix Ratio) Ratio of diamond  
dust mixed in  
0.00 to 100.00  
2 (Right)  
3 (Top)  
Crop right side of  
image.  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2 (H Size)  
Horizontal size of  
particles  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Crop top side of  
image.  
3 (V Size)  
Vertical size of  
particles  
4 (Bottom)  
5 (All)  
Crop bottom side of –100.00 to +100.00  
image.  
4 (Flash Rate) Flash rate of  
particles  
Crop all sides of  
image.  
Left value shown  
Cropping Effects  
To crop to 4:3 in 16:9 mode  
In HD format 16:9 mode, you can crop the video to 4:3.  
To turn the crop function on  
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.  
It is not supported for some patterns.  
1
2
Press the [CROP] button in the Effect/Wipe control  
block, turning it on.  
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Crop menu, turn  
[Crop] on.  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern  
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
In the Crop menu, press [4:3 Crop].  
Advanced Effect Operations  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To set a relationship between transition  
progress and cropping  
1
2
Carry out the procedure in the previous section “To  
turn th crop function on” (see page 97).  
In the Crop menu, press [Crop Trans].  
A popup window appears.  
Beveled edges in light mode Beveled edges in color mode  
To add beveled edges to video  
Note  
Beveled edges are added to both channels of 2-channel  
effects. They cannot be added to individual channels.  
3
4
Select one of the following, as required.  
Cut: Cut mode. The crop is unchanged during the  
transition, and is released when the transition  
completes.  
Last 5%: The crop is unchanged until the transition is  
95% complete, and is released during the  
remaining 5%.  
1
Press the [BVLD EDGE] button in the Effect/Wipe  
control block, turning it on.  
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Beveled Edge  
menu, turn [Beveled Edge] on.  
Linear: The cropping is removed linearly through the  
whole course of the transition.  
If you selected “Last 5%” in step 3, specify the dead  
zone of the transition by setting “Release Trans” to on  
or off.  
Off: The transition completes when 95% of the  
specified transition duration has elapsed. The crop  
is released at the same time.  
On: The last 30% of the specified transition duration  
is made a transition dead zone. The crop is  
released when 95% of the specified duration has  
elapsed.  
2
3
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
Adding Beveled Edges to Video  
1 (Width)  
Width of beveled  
edges  
0.00 to 100.00  
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.  
It is not supported for some patterns.  
a) 100 is 1/2 of the full-sized picture.  
Press [Edge Mode], turning it on.  
A popup window appears.  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern  
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Light mode and color mode  
You can add beveled edges in light mode or color mode.  
Light mode: Beveled edges are produced by varying the  
brightness at the edges of the video.  
Color mode: Beveled edges are produced by adding color  
at the edges of the video.  
4
Press [Light] to select light mode, or [Color] to select  
color mode. (See the previous section Light mode and  
98  
Advanced Effect Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
6
Select the operating channels. (See “Selecting  
Color mode:  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Lum 1) Luminance of  
edges on side  
close to light  
0.00 to 100.00  
Light mode:  
Knob  
1 (Inten 1) Luminance of  
edges on side close  
Description  
Setting values  
source  
a)  
0.00 to 200.00  
2 (Sat 1)  
Saturation of edges 0.00 to 100.00  
on side close to  
to light source  
light source  
a)  
2 (Inten 2) Luminance of  
0.00 to 200.00  
a)  
Hue of edges  
359.99 to 0.00  
3 (Hue)  
edges on side away  
from light source  
a)  
b)  
Direction of light  
source  
4 (Angle)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
b)  
3 (Angle) Direction of light  
source  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Parameter group [2/2]  
a) 0.00 is no luminance component (edges are black). 100.00 is no  
addition. 200.00 is twice as bright.  
b) 0.00 is light striking from the right side of the picture. –100.00 is one  
rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one  
rotation in the clockwise direction.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Lum 2) Luminance of  
edges on side away  
from light source  
0.00 to 100.00  
Example: Changing the angle value  
Inten 1: 80  
Inten 2: 180  
2 (Sat 2)  
Saturation of edges 0.00 to 100.00  
on side away from  
light source  
Angle  
a)  
Hue of edges  
359.99 to 0.00  
3 (Hue)  
Intensity 1  
a)  
b)  
Direction of light  
source  
4 (Angle)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1
a) Knobs 3 and 4 are shared by parameter groups 1/2 and 2/2.  
b) 0.00 is light striking from the right side of the picture. –100.00 is one  
rotation in the counterclockwise direction, and +100.00 is one  
rotation in the clockwise direction.  
Intensity 2  
Intensity 1  
2
1
To soften beveled edges  
2
Intensity 2  
1
2
3
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Beveled Edge menu,  
turn [Edge Soft] on.  
The edges  
corresponding to Inten 1  
and Inten 2 change  
j
Select the operating channels. (See “Selecting  
depending on the angle.  
Intensity 2  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
2
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Intensity 2  
Intensity 1  
1 (Inner)  
Softness of inner  
side of edges  
0.00 to 100.00  
2
1
2 (Boundary) Softness of edge  
boundaries  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
Intensity 1  
Angle  
Inner  
Boundary  
Advanced Effect Operations  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset light:  
Adding Lighting  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.  
It is not supported for some patterns.  
a)  
1 (Width)  
Width of light  
0.00 to 200.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
a)  
2 (Soft)  
Softness of light  
boundaries  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern  
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
3 (Intensity) Strength of light  
0.00 to 100.00  
Preset + shade:  
Lighting types  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
There are three types of lighting. The type of lighting is  
fixed in advance for each effect number. It cannot be  
selected.  
a)  
1 (Width)  
Width of light  
0.00 to 200.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
a)  
2 (Soft)  
Softness of light  
boundaries  
Plane light: Parallel light rays strike the picture from a  
specified direction. You can set the direction. The  
brightness of the light varies according to the angle.  
Preset light: Light strikes the picture in a form which  
varies according to the effect pattern. Brightness is  
constant, regardless of the position of the picture.  
Preset + shade: Shading is added to the Preset light  
described above.  
3 (Intensity)  
Strength of light  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
b)  
c)  
4 (Shade Ints) Intensity of light  
shadow  
5 (Shade Gain) Gain of shadow  
color  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) 100 is the value of the effect pattern width parameter when the effect  
pattern was applied.  
b) 0 is no lighting. 100 is strong lighting.  
c) 0 is black.  
To add lighting  
To set the light color  
Note  
Lighting is added to both channels of 2-channel effects. It  
cannot be added to nor adjusted for individual channels.  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Lighting menu, press  
[Light Color].  
1
Press the [LIGHT] button in the Effect/Wipe control  
block, turning it on.  
A popup window appears.  
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect > Lighting menu,  
turn [Lighting] on.  
2
3
Press a button with a color that is close to the color you  
want.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
Adding Afterimages (Trail)  
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.  
It is not supported for some patterns.  
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Parameters vary depending on the type of lighting  
used by the selected effect.  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern  
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
Plane light:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
3 (Intensity) Strength of light  
0.00 to 100.00  
100  
Advanced Effect Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To select the image to use in afterimages  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu,  
press [Trail Source].  
A popup window appears.  
Trail  
To add afterimages  
Notes  
2
3
Select one of the following as the image to insert into  
afterimages.  
• Trails are added to both channels of 2-channel effects.  
They cannot be added to nor adjusted for individual  
channels.  
• When Trail is enabled, Shadow (see page 102) is  
disabled.  
Freeze Video: Freeze images from the input video.  
Flat Color: Single-color matte.  
Hue Rotate: Single-color mattes, with the hue  
changing for each frame.  
1
Press the [TRAIL/SHDW] button in the Effect/Wipe  
control block, turning it on.  
If you selected Flat Color or Hue Rotate in step 2,  
adjust the following parameters.  
Or, in the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect > Trail/Shadow  
menu, turn [Trail/Shdw] on.  
Flat Color:  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
Hue Rotate:  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
0.00 to 100.00  
3 (Hue Speed) Speed at which  
the hue changes  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
3
Press [Type].  
A popup window appears.  
To set afterimage colors from a menu  
When the image in afterimages is Flat Color, you can press  
[Flat Color] and set the color from the popup window  
which appears.  
Select [Trail].  
See page 55 for more information about how to set the  
color.  
To transform afterimages into stardust  
The afterimage portion becomes stardust, and gradually  
disappears.  
4
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu,  
turn [Trail Dust] on.  
1 (Decay)  
Degree to which the 0.00 to 100.00  
trail is left  
Advanced Effect Operations  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (H Position) Position in  
horizontal  
–200.00 to +200.00  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Trail Dust) Amount of the  
afterimage  
direction  
0.00 to 100.00  
b)  
2 (V Position) Position in  
–200.00 to 0.00  
disappearing as  
stardust  
vertical direction  
Density of  
shadow  
3 (Density)  
0.00 to 100.00  
b)  
2 (Dust Soft) Timing with which  
stardust disappears  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) –200.00 moves left by the horizontal width of the screen, and  
+200.00 moves right by the horizontal width of the screen.  
b) –200.00 moves down by the vertical size of the screen. 0.00 is  
approximately the same position as the image.  
3 (Dust Size) Size of stardust  
a) 0.00 is no afterimages. 100.00 is no transformation of afterimages  
into stardust.  
b) Higher values make the stardust disappear more slowly.  
To set the shadow color  
Adding Shadows Around Effects  
1
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu,  
press [Shdw Color].  
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.  
It is not supported for some patterns.  
A popup window appears.  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern  
Transformations and Modifications” in the Appendix  
(separate document).  
2
3
Press a button for a color that is close to the color you  
want.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
To soften the edges of the shadow  
Shadow  
In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Trail/Shadow menu, turn  
[Shdw Soft] on.  
To add shadows  
Composing a Video border Color  
From Two Colors  
Notes  
• Shadows are added to both channels of 2-channel  
effects. They cannot be added to nor adjusted for  
individual channels.  
• When Shadow is enabled, Trail (see page 100) is  
disabled.  
You can compose the color of video borders from any two  
colors.  
This operation can only be carried out on M/E effects.  
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of “To add afterimages” (page  
101).  
About the basic border settings, see “Adding Borders to  
2
3
Select [Shadow].  
1
From the top menu, select Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect  
>Border Color.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
The Border Color menu appears.  
102  
Advanced Effect Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Saving, Recalling, and Deleting  
Effect Snapshots  
You can save snapshots of the current effect pattern  
numbers, transformation parameters, and so on, and recall  
them for later use. These snapshots are called “effect  
snapshots.”  
There are ten effect snapshot registers (1 to 10) on each of  
the M/E and P/P regions. (A region means a functional unit  
block of the system.)  
Saving effect snapshots  
2
Set the pattern used to mix the 2 colors, and specify  
color 1 and color 2.  
(page 90) for information on how to set the  
parameters.  
3
2
7
4
8
5
2
9
Note that “Mix Color” is effective only when both of  
the following conditions are met.  
• In the Effect/Wipe >M/E Effect >Main menu,  
[Border Fill] is set to “Matte.”  
• One of the effect pattern numbers 0001 to 0999 is  
selected.  
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
6
3
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
1
STORE  
MCRO  
PTN  
NO.  
10  
ENTR  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
Using Pattern Specific  
Transformations  
In addition to the transformation described in  
“Transforming Effect Patterns” (see page 95), there are  
also specific transformations which are permitted by some  
effect patterns.  
An example of one such transformation is provided below.  
For more information, refer to “Effect Pattern Transition  
Parameter List” in the Appendix (separate document).  
4
5
1
2
Make the effect settings that you want to save.  
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [EFF/WIPE]  
button, lighting it.  
The Flexi Pad control block enters effect snapshot  
mode, and the memory recall buttons take on the  
configuration shown above.  
Example of a pattern specific  
transformation (Matrix)  
1
Select one of the effect pattern numbers listed below.  
3
Press and light the region selection button for the  
region that you want to save.  
0200 to 0203, 0206 to 0213, 0224 to 0247, 0250 to  
0257, 0260 to 0269.  
• To save M/E effect settings, press the [M/E] button.  
• To save PGM/PST effect settings, press the [PP/  
ALL] button (1.5M/E panel only).  
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
4
5
Press the [STORE] button, lighting it.  
1 (H Tile No)  
Number of tiles in  
horizontal direction  
2 to 36  
The system is now ready to save an effect snapshot.  
2 (V Tile No)  
Number of tiles in  
vertical direction  
2 to 18  
Press the memory recall button for the register in  
which you want to save the effect snapshot.  
Advanced Effect Operations  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Note  
Pressing a button which is lit in orange or yellow will  
overwrite the current contents of the register.  
Advanced Key  
Operations  
When the save is complete, the button that you pressed  
lights in yellow and the number on the button changes  
from a register number to an effect pattern figure.  
The pattern number appears in the numeric display.  
This section explains procedures for setting M/E key 1.  
The same procedures can be used for the other keys as well  
(M/E key 2, and downstream keys 1 and 2).  
Recalling effect snapshots  
Processing Key Signals  
3
1
To turn key clean mode on  
Clean mode  
In a luminance key or linear key, you can enable the clean  
mode. When the clean mode is on, the key source does not  
affect the key fill, which is added unchanged to the  
background. This improves the keyed image quality, but  
means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be  
inserted must be completely black, or it will color the  
background.  
This mode is effective when using character generators,  
which generate paired key source and key fill signals.  
Note that in the following situations, the clean mode goes  
off, and cannot be turned on.  
7
4
8
5
2
9
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
6
3
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
1
STORE  
MCRO  
PTN  
NO.  
10  
ENTR  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
• When the key type is a pattern key or chroma key  
• When key inversion (Key Invert) is on  
• When the Key Position function is on  
2
4
• When fine key is on  
• When the key fill is a matte  
• When the key edge is anything other than normal  
• When the key edge is normal, and soft edges are on  
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [EFF/WIPE]  
button, lighting it.  
2
3
If the [STORE] button is lit, press it to turn it off.  
To turn clean mode on  
Press to light the region selection button (M/E or PP/  
ALL) for the region of the snapshot that you want to  
recall.  
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Key  
Source.  
The Key Source menu appears.  
The memory recall buttons show figures of the saved  
effect patterns. Buttons where snapshots are already  
saved are lit in orange.  
4
Press the memory recall button for the effect snapshot  
that you want.  
When the recall finishes, the pressed button lights in  
yellow and the numeric display shows the pattern  
number of the corresponding pattern.  
Deleting effect snapshots  
With the [STORE] button lit, hold the [EFF/WIPE] button  
down and press the memory recall button for the effect  
snapshot that you want to delete. The button you pressed is  
turned off, and the effect snapshot is deleted.  
2
Press [Clean Mode], turning it on.  
104  
Advanced Key Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
To invert key signals  
Adjusting Key Borders  
You can invert the black/white of key signals. This allows  
you to use a key source as black characters against a white  
background and white characters against a black  
background.  
information about how to make basic key border settings.  
To turn the key inversion function on, in the Key >M/E  
Key1 >Key Source menu, press [Key Invert], turning it on.  
Applying 2-color borders  
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Edge.  
The Edge menu appears.  
To adjust the key position  
For luminance keys, linear keys, and chroma keys, you can  
move the edges of the key signal horizontally.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Key Source menu, press [Key  
Position], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Left Pos)  
Left edge position  
–4.00 to +4.00  
2 (Right Pos) Right edge position –4.00 to +4.00  
3 (H Phase) Horizontal direction Left Pos value  
position shown  
2
3
Press [Mix Color], turning it on.  
To turn the fine key function on  
Set the pattern used to mix the 2 colors, and specify  
color 1 and color 2.  
When the fine key function is on, you can make fine  
adjustments to the left, right, top, and bottom edge  
positions of the key signal.  
(page 90) for information on how to set the  
parameters. Note that the parameters H Modulation  
and V Modulation are not available for color mix  
patterns.  
Note  
When fine key is on, the width of borders, drop borders,  
drop shadows, and outlines is limited to a maximum to 4.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Key Source menu, press [Fine  
Key], turning it on.  
To set separate border widths (Separate  
Edge function)  
When you add borders or outlines to luminance keys,  
linear keys, or chroma keys, you can set the widths of the  
four borders separately.  
Make fine adjustments to key edge positions by setting  
the following parameters with the knobs.  
Parameter group [1/2]  
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Edge menu, press [Sep Edge],  
turning it on.  
The width of the four borders are now separately  
adjustable.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
–2.00 to +2.00  
–2.00 to +2.00  
–2.00 to +2.00  
1 (Left Pos)  
Left edge position  
2 (Right Pos) Right edge position  
3 (Top Pos) Top edge position  
Setting maximum border widths  
4 (Bottom Pos) Bottom edge position –2.00 to +2.00  
When you add borders, drop borders, drop shadows, or  
outlines to key edges, proceed as follows to set the  
maximum width.  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Edge menu, press [Delay  
Mode], turning it on.  
1 (H Phase) Horizontal  
position  
Left Pos value shown  
2 (V Phase) Vertical position Top Pos value shown  
A popup window appears.  
Press one of the following.  
2
Advanced Key Operations  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
4H Mode: Set the maximum width to 4 (4 lines). Key  
fill and key source drop down by 4 lines.  
forcibly cut any parts below this level. This is called the  
plane function.  
8H Mode: Set the maximum width to 8 (8 lines). Key  
fill and key source drop down by 8 lines.  
The plane function is enabled when additive mix is  
selected.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press  
[Plane], turning it on.  
Adjusting Chroma Keys  
Proceed as follows to make fine adjustments to the chroma  
key image obtained with auto chroma key (see page 81).  
Set the following parameter with knob 1.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
To select the chroma key composition  
method  
1 (Lum)  
Luminance level  
0.00 to 100.00  
To adjust chroma keys manually  
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma  
Key.  
Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma  
keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma  
key function, and manual adjustment carrying out the  
necessary processing separately. The optimum results will  
be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto  
chroma key function, then making fine adjustments as  
required.  
The Chroma Key menu appears.  
The following manual adjustments are possible.  
• Key active  
• Color cancel  
• Window  
• Y balance  
• Chroma key shadow  
• Video signal adjustment  
2
3
Press [Mix Mode].  
To make adjustments with key active  
When the key active function is on, the composite video is  
output and you can adjust the composition method  
manually while viewing the monitor.  
When the key active function is off, only the foreground is  
output. You should turn key active off when making  
manual adjustments with color cancel (see the next  
section).  
A popup window appears.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, turn [Key  
Active] on.  
Select one of the following.  
Normal Mix: The background is cut out with the key  
signal, and then combined with the foreground,  
which has also been cut out with the key signal.  
Additive Mix: The background, which has been cut  
out with the key signal, is combined with the  
unshaped foreground. This is effective for a  
natural looking composite when the scene  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Clip)  
Chroma key  
reference level  
0.00 to 100.00  
2 (Gain)  
3 (Hue)  
Key gain  
Hue  
–100.00 to +100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
includes glass or other translucent objects.  
4 (Density) Key density  
5 (Filter) Filter coefficient  
0.00 to 100.00  
To turn the plane function on  
a)  
1 to 9  
In an additive mix, the foreground is not shaped by the key  
signal, and variations in the (blue) background appear in  
the composite image. To prevent this, it is possible to set a  
particular luminance level for the background, and  
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter  
becomes stronger as larger numbers are specified  
106  
Advanced Key Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Setting the color cancel key edge positions  
To make adjustments with color cancel  
If the foreground image includes shades of the background  
color, turn this function on to remove the color from the  
foreground image.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [CC  
Key Pos], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, turn [Key  
Active] off, and turn [Color Cancel] on.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Left Pos)  
Move the left edge of –3.00 to +3.00  
the color cancel key.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
2 (Right Pos)  
3 (H Phase)  
Move the right edge –3.00 to +3.00  
of the color cancel  
key.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
4 (Filter)  
Horizontal position of Left Pos value  
the color cancel key. shown  
a)  
Filter coefficient  
1 to 9  
Adjusting the ratio of Y balance added to a color  
cancel key  
a) Set to 1 for through processing, with no filter applied. The filter  
becomes stronger as larger numbers are specified  
For the Y balance function, see “To adjust the Y balance”  
3
Turn [Key Active] on.  
The video composed with chroma key reappears on  
the monitor.  
By using the Y balance function on a color cancel key,  
colors of the same hue as the background (typically blue)  
can be output in the foreground without being cancelled.  
Adjusting the key signal for color cancel  
When color cancel is on, you can adjust the key signal for  
color cancel.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [CC  
Y Balance], turning it on.  
1
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press  
[Cancel Key], turning it on.  
Set the following parameter with the knob.  
The color cancel function is turned on.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Mixture) Y balance key ratio 0.00 to 100.00  
2
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
To adjust the window  
1 (Clip)  
Reference level 0.00 to 100.00  
Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a  
particular color (reference color) in the foreground  
(typically a plain blue background). The “window” refers  
to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this  
specified reference color to create the key signal.  
As seen on a vectorscope, the range for this matching  
corresponds to a truncated sector (see the following  
figure). This range is specified by two parameters: the  
“Angle” parameter, which determines the range of the hue  
parameter, and the “Crop” parameter, which determines  
the degree of truncation.  
of color cancel  
key  
2 (Gain)  
Key gain  
–100.00 to +100.00  
3
Make the following settings as required.  
Adjusting the color cancel key window (range of  
matching colors)  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [CC  
Window], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Crop)  
100.00 to 0.00  
Crop value  
Angle value  
a)  
2 (Angle)  
180.00 to 0.00  
a) See the figure in “To adjust the window.”  
Advanced Key Operations  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Knob  
Description  
Key gain  
Setting values  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
2 (Gain)  
3 (Lum)  
Luminance  
Angle a)  
To adjust chroma key shadows  
Reference color hue  
This function provides a more realistic treatment when the  
shadow of an object in the field of view falls on the blue  
background. Since parts of the blue background darker  
than a specified intensity are treated as shadows, there is  
no effect on cutting out of the foreground.  
Crop a)  
Range of colors  
remaining as  
foreground  
Range of colors creating the  
key signal (to be replaced by  
background signal)  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press  
[Shadow], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
a) The Crop and Angle values do not change even if you  
use the auto chroma key function.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Lum)  
Reference  
luminance of  
shadow  
0.00 to 100.00  
To adjust the window, the Clip, Gain, Hue must be  
adjusted to appropriate values. Set these to appropriate  
values first, and then proceed as follows.  
2 (Gain)  
Gain of shadow  
key  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press  
[Window], turning it on.  
3 (Density) Density of shadow 0.00 to 100.00  
4 (Soft)  
Softness of  
shadow  
0.00 to 100.00  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Note  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
When chroma key shadowing is on, key edges are normal  
with soft edges off.  
a)  
1 (Crop)  
100.00 to 0.00  
Crop value  
Angle value  
a)  
2 (Angle)  
180.00 to 0.00  
To adjust video signals  
a) See above figure.  
You can vary the gain and hue of chroma key foreground  
video. Gain can be adjusted for the overall video signal, or  
individually for Y and C.  
To adjust the Y balance  
In normal chroma keying, the key signal is based on the  
chrominance component only, and all elements of the  
foreground with the same hue are replaced by the  
background. Using the Y balance function, you can specify  
a luminance level range within which the key is active, and  
replace the specified part by the background.  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press  
[Frgd V Proc], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.  
You can use the Y balance function independently on the  
key signal for the composition and the key signal for the  
color cancel function. When applied to the key signal for  
the composition, this produces the foreground with the  
color cancel effect applied. This can therefore be used to  
provide an impression of smoke, for example.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Video Gain) Overall gain of  
video signal  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2 (Y Gain)  
3 (C Gain)  
Gain of Y signal –100.00 to +100.00  
Gain of C signal –100.00 to +100.00  
4 (Hue Offset) Amount of hue  
offset  
–180.00 to +180.00  
1
2
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Chroma Key menu, press [Y  
Balance], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Clip)  
Reference level of 0.00 to 100.00  
color cancel key  
108  
Advanced Key Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Transforming the Pattern of a  
Pattern Key  
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Pattern  
Key.  
The Pattern Key menu appears.  
2
Press [Mask Source].  
A popup window appears.  
2
Press one of the following buttons, depending on what  
you want to adjust.  
3
4
Select either of the following.  
For details about operation, see the sections on effect  
transformations (on the pages indicated in  
parentheses).  
Box: Box-shaped mask signal  
Pattern: Mask signal with the same pattern as a  
standard group effect pattern.  
Position: Change the key pattern position (page 63).  
Aspect: Change the key pattern aspect ratio (page 95).  
Rotation: Rotate the key pattern to a specified angle  
(page 95). Note that the parameter Magnitude is  
not available for pattern keys.  
Multi: Arrange several examples of the same key  
pattern (page 96). When using a pattern key,  
operate in the same way as in “For a PGM/PST  
effect:” in the effect transformation procedure.  
Set the following parameters, depending on the mask  
type selected in step 3.  
When Box was selected:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Left)  
Position of left  
edge  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2 (Right)  
3 (Top)  
Position of right  
edge  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Position of top  
edge  
Setting Key Mask Shapes and  
Positions  
4 (Bottom)  
5 (Soft)  
Position of  
bottom edge  
information about how to make basic key mask settings.  
Softness of  
edges  
1
From the top menu, select Key >M/E Key1 >Mask.  
The Mask menu appears.  
Advanced Key Operations  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
When Pattern was selected:  
Key memory operating modes  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
There are two key memory operating modes: simple mode  
and full mode. Make a setup setting to select one of the  
modes.  
The parameters stored differ as shown below, according to  
the operating mode.  
1 (Size)  
2 (Soft)  
Size of pattern  
Softness of  
edges  
a)  
3 (Pattern)  
Pattern number  
1 to 24  
Parameters stored in simple mode  
• Key type  
• Key inversion (Key Invert)  
a) Same as patterns in the standard group.  
To invert a mask signal  
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Mask menu, press [Mask Invert],  
turning it on.  
• Adjustment settings for the particular key type  
- Luminance key and linear key: Clip, Gain, Density,  
and Filter settings, clean mode on and off.  
- Chroma key: Settings excluding color cancel, Y  
balance, foreground video process, window, and  
shadow.  
To transform a mask pattern  
In the Key >M/E Key1 >Mask menu, press one of the  
following buttons, depending on how you want to  
transform the pattern.  
- Pattern key: Size, Soft, Density  
Parameters stored in full mode  
All key settings, except for transitions  
For details about operation, see the sections on effect  
transformations (on the pages indicated in parentheses).  
On how to turn the key memory function on or off and  
select the key memory operating mode, see “Selecting the  
Position: Change the mask pattern position (page 63).  
Aspect: Change the mask pattern aspect ratio (page 95).  
Rotation: Rotate the mask pattern to a specified angle  
(page 95). Note that the parameter Magnitude is not  
available for masks.  
Multi: Arrange several examples of the same mask pattern  
(page 96). When using a mask, operate in the same  
way as “For a PGM/PST wipe.”  
To recall settings stored in key memory  
When the key memory function on, stored settings are  
recalled automatically at the same time that key signals are  
selected.  
Using the Show Key Function  
Show key is a function to output, for a specified time, key-  
processed B&W signals from Edit PVW output.  
Make a setup setting (with the Key menu) to enable and  
disable the show key function, and to set the length of the  
output time.  
To output show key signals  
In the key >M/E Key1 >Main menu, press [Show Key],  
turning it on.  
Show key signals are output when the button lights. Output  
ends after the specified hold time.  
You can stop show key output by pressing [Show Key]  
during the output.  
Using Key Memory  
The key memory function allows the keyer settings on  
each cross-point button to be automatically stored, so that  
the next time the same cross-point button is selected these  
settings are recalled automatically.  
110  
Advanced Key Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Input video processing (see page 112)  
r
Color Correction  
Primary color correction (see page 113)  
r
Secondary color correction (see page 114)  
Color correction (CCR) enables input video color  
correction (black balance/white balance adjustment,  
gamma correction, knee correction, etc.).  
r
r
Luminance processing (see page 115)  
Note  
r
The following optional boards are required to use the color  
correction function.  
• MKS-2420M Color Corrector Board  
• MKS-2440 Frame Memory Board Set  
The MKS-2420M is mounted on the MKS-2440.  
Spot color adjustment (see page 117)  
r
Output video processing (see page 118)  
r
You can use two color correctors in each step. You can  
also mask part of the region to be corrected (see page 114).  
Selecting the Color Correction  
Signal  
CCR Menu  
To apply color correction to a signal, capture the signal  
from the CCR1 bus or CCR2 bus.  
The following signals can be selected from these buses.  
• All primary inputs  
For color correction operations, use the CCR menu.  
• Frame memory video 1 to 3  
• Frame memory key 1 to 3  
• White  
• Black  
• Color background  
To access the CCR menu  
1
From the top menu, select CCR >CCR1 or CCR2.  
A popup window appears.  
To select a signal  
1
Press the [CCR1] or [CCR2] AUX delegation button.  
The cross-point button rows are assigned to the CCR1  
bus or CCR2 bus.  
2
Press a button in a cross-point button row to select the  
desired signal.  
The button lights in red (high tally) if the signal on the  
CCR1 bus or CCR2 bus is included in the program  
video (final output video). Otherwise it lights in amber  
(low tally).  
2
Press the button for the menu you want to use, to  
display the menu.  
Input Process: Input video processing (see page 112)  
Primary: Primary color correction (see page 113)  
Secondary: Secondary color correction (see page  
Output of Color Correction Results  
RGB Clip: RGB clip (see page 115)  
Lum Process: Luminance process (see page 115)  
Spot: Spot color adjustment (see page 117)  
Output Process: Output video processing (see page  
YUV Clip: YUV clip (see page 118)  
Mask1: Mask 1 (see page 114)  
You can assign signals to which color correction has been  
applied to cross-point buttons, and output the corrected  
signals by pressing those buttons.  
For details of the assignment process, see “Selecting  
Mask2: Mask 2 (see page 114)  
Flow of Color Correction Operations  
Color correction is carried out in the following steps.  
Color Correction  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
2
Using any of the following methods, select the copy  
source color corrector and the copy destination color  
corrector.  
To enable a color corrector  
The following example shows how to enable color  
corrector 1 (CCR1). You can proceed in the same way to  
enable CCR2.  
• Press directly on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
1
2
From the top menu, select CCR >CCR1.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Press a menu button other than [Mask1] or [Mask2] to  
display the menu.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (From No) Copy source color  
corrector selection  
1 or 2  
3
Press [CCR], turning it on.  
4 (To No)  
Copy destination color 1 or 2  
corrector selection  
This enables all of the functions of color corrector 1.  
When you select either the source or destination color  
corrector, the other color corrector is selected  
automatically.  
To return all color corrector settings to the  
defaults  
The following example shows how to proceed for color  
corrector 1 (CCR1). You can proceed in the same way for  
CCR2.  
3
Press [Copy] to execute a copy, or [Swap] to execute a  
swap.  
To undo a copy or swap  
1
2
From the top menu, select CCR >CCR1.  
Press [Undo] in the Copy/Swap menu. The color  
correctors are restored to their states before the copy or  
swap.  
Press a menu button other than [Mask1] or [Mask2] to  
display the menu.  
3
Press [Unity All].  
Input Video Processing  
A message appears asking if you want to return all  
settings to the default settings.  
You can adjust the following for YUV signals.  
• Overall video signal gain  
• Y signal gain  
• C signal gain  
• Hue delay  
4
Press [Yes] in the message to return to the defaults, or  
[No] to cancel.  
• Black level  
If you pressed [Yes], all color corrector settings are  
returned to the default settings.  
To execute input video processing  
Display the Input Process menu, then proceed as follows.  
To copy or swap color corrector settings  
1
From the top menu, select CCR >Copy/Swap.  
The Copy/Swap menu appears. The status area shows  
a copy source list (From) on the left and a copy  
destination list (To) on the right.  
1
2
Press [Input Proc], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
112  
Color Correction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1
2
Press [Primary], turning it on.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Video Gain) Overall video  
signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
As required, press the button for the adjustment you  
want to make, and turn the knobs to adjust the  
parameters.  
2 (Y Gain)  
3 (C Gain)  
Y signal gain  
C signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–116.90 to +116.90  
[Black]:  
4 (Hue Delay) Hue delay  
5 (Black Level) Black level  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Red)  
Black balance of R  
(red) signal  
–100.00 to +100.00  
To return input video processing parameters to  
their default settings  
Press [Unity].  
2 (Green) Black balance of G  
(green) signal  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
3 (Blue)  
Black balance of B  
(blue) signal  
4 (All)  
Black balance of R, G, Red value is shown  
and B signals  
(adjusted at once)  
Primary Color Correction  
Adjust the following for RGB signals.  
• Black balance  
• White balance  
[White]:  
• Gamma correction  
• Knee correction  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Red)  
White balance of R  
(red) signal  
0.00 to 200.00  
White balance  
adjustment  
2 (Green) White balance of G  
(green) signal  
0.00 to 200.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
Output level  
Output level  
3 (Blue)  
White balance of B  
(blue) signal  
Gamma  
correction  
4 (All)  
White balance of R, G, Red value is shown  
and B signals  
(adjusted at once)  
Input level  
Black balance adjustment  
Knee  
correction  
Input level  
[Gamma]:  
Unadjusted signal  
Adjusted signal  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Red)  
Gamma correction of –100.00 to +100.00  
R (red) signal  
2 (Green) Gamma correction of –100.00 to +100.00  
G (green) signal  
3 (Blue)  
Gamma correction of –100.00 to +100.00  
B (blue) signal  
To execute primary color correction  
4 (All)  
Gamma correction of Red value is shown  
R, G, and B signals  
(adjusted at once)  
Display the Primary menu, and carry out the following  
operation.  
[Knee]:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Red)  
Knee correction of R  
(red) signal  
20.00 to 75.00  
2 (Green) Knee correction of G 20.00 to 75.00  
(green) signal  
3 (Blue)  
Knee correction of B  
(blue) signal  
20.00 to 75.00  
Color Correction  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6
7
Referring to “CCR Menu” (page 111), open the  
Primary menu.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
4 (All)  
Knee correction of R, Red value is shown  
G, and B signals  
(adjusted at once)  
Press [Mask] and adjust the following parameters.  
When Box was selected as the mask source:  
To return primary color correction parameters to  
their default settings  
Press [Unity].  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Left)  
2 (Right)  
3 (Top)  
Left edge position –100.00 to +100.00  
Right edge position –100.00 to +100.00  
Top edge position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
To mask part of the primary color  
correction  
4 (Bottom)  
Bottom edge  
position  
5 (Soft)  
Degree of softness 0.00 to 100.00  
of box  
Note  
The mask function is common to the following color  
correction functions.  
• Primary color correction  
When Pattern was selected as the mask source:  
• Secondary color correction  
• Luminance processing  
• Spot color adjustment  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (H Position) Horizontal position –200.00 to +200.00  
2 (V Position) Vertical position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
For example, if in primary color correction you set mask 1  
to a box, then in secondary color correction set mask 1 to  
a pattern, this also changes the setting in primary color  
correction to the pattern.  
3 (Size)  
4 (Soft)  
Pattern size  
Degree of softness 0.00 to 100.00  
of pattern edge  
5 (Pattern)  
Pattern number  
1 to 24  
Here the procedure for mask 1 operation is described by  
way of example. You can carry out mask 2 operation in a  
similar way.  
To invert the mask source  
Press [Mask Invert] in the Primary menu.  
1
Press [Mask] in the Primary menu.  
A popup window appears.  
Secondary Color Correction  
You can adjust the following across a 30° range around  
the center point of the color, for each of six colors (red,  
green, blue, yellow, cyan, and magenta).  
• Luminance  
• Saturation  
• Hue delay  
2
3
Press [Mask 1] to apply a mask.  
To execute secondary color correction  
Display the Secondary menu, then proceed as follows.  
Press the 3rd menu title button from the top.  
A popup window (see page 111) appears.  
4
5
Press [Mask 1].  
The Mask 1 menu appeas.  
Note that the mask menu 1 can also be accessed from  
the CCR >CCR1 menu.  
Set the mask source and mask pattern transformation  
method.  
For details about operation, refer to “Setting Key  
114  
Color Correction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1
2
Press [Secondary], turning it on.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Green)  
Dark/white clip of G –50.00 to +150.00  
(green) signal  
Press the button for the color to adjust ([Blue], [Cyan],  
[Green], [Yellow], [Red], or [Magenta]), then adjust  
the following parameters.  
3 (Blue)  
4 (All)  
Dark/white clip of B –50.00 to +150.00  
(blue) signal  
Dark/white clip R, G, Red value is  
and B signals  
(adjusted  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue delay  
Setting values  
shown  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
simultaneously)  
To return RGB clip parameters to their default  
settings  
3 (Hue  
Delay)  
–180.00 to +180.00  
Press [Unity].  
To return secondary color correction parameters  
to their default settings  
Luminance Processing  
Press [Unity].  
You can divide the luminance levels of YUV signals into  
three regions (Dark, Middle, and Bright), and adjust the  
video signals of each region separately.  
To mask part of the secondary color  
correction  
Press [Mask] in the Secondary menu, turning it on. The  
proceed as explained in “To mask part of the primary color  
correction” (see page 114).  
1 Under Dark point  
2 Middle/Dark point  
3 Bright/Middle point  
4 Over Bright point  
Dark region  
Middle region  
Bright region  
RGB Clip  
You can make the following adjustments for RGB signals.  
• Dark clip (lower limit of signal level)  
• White clip (upper limit of signal level)  
To execute luminance processing  
Display the Luminance Process menu, then proceed as  
follows.  
To execute RGB clip  
Display the RGB Clip menu, then proceed as follows.  
1
2
Press [RGB Clip], turning it on.  
1
2
Press [Lum Proc], turning it on.  
Press [Mode].  
Press [Dark] or [White], then set the following  
parameters.  
A popup window appears so that you can select the  
adjustment mode.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Red)  
Dark/white clip of R –50.00 to +150.00  
(red) signal  
3
Depending on what you want to adjust, press one of  
the following to select an adjustment mode.  
Color Correction  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Tint: Add a specified color to the original video  
signal.  
Color Modify: Adjust the original video signal.  
Y Modify: Adjust the output levels of the input  
luminance signal.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
4 (Under D Lvl) Luminance level at –50.00 to +50.00  
lower limit of Dark  
region  
[Bound Soft] parameters:  
Set the degree of boundary softness of the three  
regions.  
4
If you selected [Tint] or [Color Modify], proceed to  
step 5. If you selected [Y Modify], adjust the  
following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Knob  
Description  
White balance  
Black balance  
Setting values  
1 (Over B Soft)  
Degree of softness 15.00 to 70.00  
at upper limit of  
Bright region  
1 (White)  
2 (Black)  
3 (Y Lift)  
0.00 to 200.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2 (Mid B Soft)  
3 (D Mid Soft)  
Degree of softness 15.00 to 42.50  
at boundary  
between Bright and  
Middle regions  
Curvature of  
luminance level  
curve  
4 (Y Dark) Position of maximum –7.30 to +109.58  
Degree of softness 15.00 to 42.50  
at boundary  
between Middle  
point of luminance  
level curve  
and Dark regions  
Output signal  
luminance  
level  
4 (Under D Soft) Degree of softness 15.00 to 70.00  
Output signal  
luminance  
level  
at lower limit of  
Dark region  
6
Press [Dark], [Middle], or [Bright] to select a region,  
then adjust the following parameters.  
Y Lift  
White  
balance  
adjustment  
Tint mode:  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
Y Dark  
Input signal  
luminance level  
Inputsignal  
luminance  
level  
Black balance  
adjustment  
Signal before  
adjustment  
Signal after  
adjustment  
Color modify mode:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Lum)  
2 (C Gain)  
Luminance  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 200.00  
5
Press [Bound Level] or [Bound Soft], and make  
settings for the three regions (Dark, Middle, Bright).  
C signal gain  
3 (Hue Delay) Hue delay  
–180.00 to +180.00  
[Bound Level] parameters:  
Set the boundaries of the three regions.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
To return luminance processing parameters to  
their default settings  
Press [Unity].  
1 (Over B Lvl) Luminance level at 50.00 to 150.00  
upper limit of Bright  
region  
2 (Mid B Lvl)  
3 (D Mid Lvl)  
Luminance level at 10.00 to 120.00  
boundary between  
Bright and Middle  
To mask part of the luminance processing  
Press [Mask] in the Luminance Process menu, turning it  
on. Then proceed as explained in “To mask part of the  
primary color correction” (see page 114).  
regions  
Luminance level at –20.00 to +90.00  
boundary between  
Middle and Dark  
regions  
116  
Color Correction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spot Color Adjustment  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
–7.31 to +109.59  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
4 (Gain)  
You can change the color in a specified region to another  
color, without affecting other regions. You can also adjust  
the following in the regions outside the spot color  
adjustment region.  
Key gain  
–100.00 to  
+100.00  
• Video signal overall gain  
• Y signal gain  
• Y signal offset  
• C signal gain  
• C signal hue delay  
6
7
Press [Window], turning it on., to adjust the key  
detection range for spot color adjustment.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
To execute spot color adjustment  
Display the Spot menu, the proceed as follows.  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
Press [Spot], and adjust the replacement color.  
Knob  
Description  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
–7.31 to +109.59  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 (Lum)  
2 (Sat)  
3 (Hue)  
To return spot color adjustment parameters to  
their default settings  
Press [Spot Unity].  
1
2
Press [Spot], turning it on.  
Press [Sample Mark], turning it on.  
To mask part of the spot color adjustment  
When [Sample Mark] is on, the effects of color  
Press [Mask] in the Spot menu, turning it on. Then proceed  
as explained in “To mask part of the primary color  
correction” (see page 114).  
adjustment outside the region of spot color adjustment  
and output video processing are temporarily disabled.  
(Turning [Sample Mark] off restores the former state.)  
To adjust colors outside the spot color  
adjustment region  
3
Adjust the following parameters so that the color you  
want to change is included within the sample mark.  
1
2
With [Spot] on in the Spot menu, press [Outer Proc],  
turning it on.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (H Position) Horizontal position –100.00 to +100.00  
2 (V Position) Vertical position  
3 (Size) Size  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1.00 to 100.00  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
4
5
Press [Auto Start], to adjust the key automatically.  
1 (Video Gain) Overall gain of –200.00 to +200.00  
video signal  
Note  
2 (Y Gain)  
Y signal gain  
C signal gain  
Hue delay  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–116.90 to +116.90  
This automatic adjustment does not carry out key gain  
adjustment. If required, adjust the key gain as shown  
in step 5.  
3 (C Gain)  
4 (Hue Delay)  
5 (Black Level) Black level  
Press [Key Adjust], then adjust the following key  
parameters.  
Color Correction  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To return [Outer Proc] parameters to their default  
settings  
Press [Outer Unity].  
YUV Clip  
You can adjust the following for luminance signals and  
color difference signals.  
• White clip (Upper limit of luminance signal level)  
• Dark clip (Lower limit of luminance signal level)  
• Positive clip (Maximum amplitude in positive direction  
of color difference signal)  
• Negative clip (Maximum amplitude in Negative  
direction of color difference signal)  
Output Video Processing  
You can adjust the following for YUV signals.  
• Overall gain of video signal  
• Y signal gain  
• Y signal offset  
• C signal gain  
• C signal hue delay  
To execute YUV clip  
Display the YUV Clip menu, then proceed as follows.  
To execute output video processing  
Display the Output Process menu, then proceed as follows.  
1
2
Press [YUV Clip], turning it on.  
Depending on the signal you want to adjust, press one  
of the following to select the target for adjustment.  
1
2
Press [Output Proc], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Luminance: Luminance signal  
Chroma: Color difference signal.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
3
Adjust the following parameters for the signal selected  
in step 2.  
1 (Video Gain) Overall gain of  
video signal  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2 (Y Gain)  
3 (C Gain)  
Y signal gain  
C signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–116.90 to +116.90  
Luminance:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
–6.85 to +109.13  
–6.85 to +109.13  
4 (Hue Delay) Hue delay  
5 (Black Level) Black level  
1 (White Clip) White clip  
2 (Dark Clip)  
Dark clip  
Note  
When [Sample Mark] in the Spot menu is on, the effects of  
color adjustment outside the region of spot color  
adjustment and output video processing are temporarily  
disabled.  
Chroma:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (U Posi Clip) Positive clip  
adjustment for  
–113.39 to +113.39  
Turning [Sample Mark] off restores the former state.  
U signal  
To return output video processing parameters to  
their default settings  
Press [Unity].  
2 (U Nega Clip) Negative clip  
adjustment for  
–113.39 to +113.39  
–113.39 to +113.39  
U signal  
3 (V Posi Clip) Positive clip  
adjustment for V  
signal  
118  
Color Correction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Frame Memory  
4 (V Nega Clip) Negative clip  
adjustment for V  
signal  
–113.39 to +113.39  
Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input  
video can be frozen and written to memory, for further use  
as material for editing.  
To return YUV clip parameters to their default  
settings  
Press [Unity].  
Overview  
Frame memory capacity  
The number of frames which can be saved in frame  
memory varies as shown below, depending on the signal  
format used by the switcher system.  
s
System  
Signal format Frame memory capacity  
HD system 720p  
1080i  
88 frames  
58 frames  
1080PsF  
SD system 480i  
576i  
444 frames  
Hardware and software requirements for  
using frame memory  
To use frame memory, the switcher system requires the  
following options.  
• MKS-2440 Frame Memory Board Set  
• BZS-2440M Frame Memory Upgrade Software  
However, the BZS-2440M software is not required when  
the signal format is 480i or 576i.  
Flow of Frame Memory Operations  
The flow of frame memory operations is as follows.  
Assign frame memory output to a cross-point.  
r
Select the input signal (video before freeze, etc.). (See  
r
Freeze the video at the desired point and save an image file  
in frame memory. (See page 120.)  
r
• Recall a desired freeze image from an image file saved  
in memory. (See page 122.)  
• Rename (see page 122) or delete (see page 123) an  
image file saved in memory.  
Frame Memory  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Select the desired signal in the cross-point button rows  
of the auxiliary bus control block.  
Preparations  
The selected signal is input to frame memory.  
Assigning frame memory output to cross-  
point buttons  
Frame memory images (freeze images, etc.) can be  
assigned to either the video or key channels of frame  
memory 1 to 3.  
Freezing Images and Saving Them  
to Memory  
The following three types of output destinations are  
available (six channels).  
• FM 1 Video and FM 1 Key  
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory> Freeze.  
The Freeze menu appears.  
• FM 2 Video and FM 2 Key  
• FM 3 Video and FM 3 Key  
Output of selected frame memory  
Before using frame memory images, you need to assign  
one or more of the six channels listed above to cross-point  
buttons.  
Key thumbnail  
Video thumbnail  
You can assign channels in pairs. For example, if you  
assign FM 1 Video and FM 1 Key as a pair, you can select  
both the video and the key with the same cross-point  
button.  
For details about assignment operations, refer to  
Selecting Input Signals for Frame  
Memory  
Select the signal (video, etc.) to be processed with frame  
memory.  
There are two buses for selecting input video signals.  
Frame memory video bus: Allows the frame memory  
video input signal to be selected.  
2
To change the frame memory output destination (FM1  
in the above figure), press [FM Output].  
Frame memory key bus: Allows the frame memory key  
input signal to be selected.  
3
4
To operate on video and key as a pair, press [Pair],  
turning it on.  
1
In the auxiliary bus control block of the control panel,  
press the AUX delegation button [FRAME MEM],  
turning it on.  
When [Pair] is turned off in step 3, press one of the  
output buttons (in the above figure, [FM1V] or  
[FM1K]) to select the target.  
2
Switch the [SRC BUS] button in the auxiliary bus  
control block as follows.  
The selected button turns light blue.  
• To select the video input signal, turn the [SRC BUS]  
button off.  
The auxiliary bus switches to the frame memory  
video bus. In this case, the key assigned as a pair to  
the selected video is automatically selected on the  
frame memory key bus.  
• To select the key input signal, turn the [SRC BUS]  
button on.  
The auxiliary bus switches to the frame memory key  
bus. In this case, you can select the key  
independently of the video.  
5
6
Press [Freeze] to display “Enable.”  
A freeze frame can now be captured.  
If required, apply a mask to the selected signal. (See  
7
At the point you want to freeze, press one of the  
following.  
Frame Frz: Freeze an image frame.  
Field Frz: Freeze an image field.  
120  
Frame Memory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
• For a key file, “(k)” is automatically appended to the file  
name.  
Note  
In the following signal formats, a field freeze is not  
possible.  
1080PsF/23.976, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/  
29.97, 720P/59.94  
Saving files with [Pair] on/off  
When saving with [Pair] turned off, a file is created for  
either the video or key. (Referred to below as an “Single  
file.”)  
When [Pair] is turned on, both video and key files are  
created with the same name. (Referred to below as “Pair  
files.”)  
This freezes the input image.  
In this state, no freeze image has yet been saved. You  
can repeat this operation any number of times, until the  
desired freeze image is obtained.  
To apply a box-shaped mask to a freeze image  
8
When you have obtained the freeze image you want,  
press [Store] in the Freeze menu, and confirm the  
name in the keyboard window.  
1
2
To link the video and key with a mask, press [Mask  
Link] in the Freeze menu, turning it on.  
For details of the saved file names, see the next item,  
“File names.”  
When [Mask Link] is turned off in step 1, press one of  
the output buttons ([FM1V] or [FM1K] in the example  
display of the Freeze menu on page 120), to select it.  
If, before saving the freeze image, you press [FM  
Output] to switch the frame memory, the freeze image  
is saved automatically in freeze memory. (Automatic  
save)  
The selected button turns light blue.  
Note  
Even when [Pair] is on, if [Mask Link] is off, you can  
apply different masks to the video and key. In this  
case, press the output button to select it for the  
operation.  
The freeze image is saved in memory, and a thumbnail  
for the video and/or key appears.  
The “Remain” count under [Store], showing the  
number of images that can be saved, decreases by one  
(or by two if [Pair] is turned on in step 3).  
3
4
Press [Box Mask], turning it on.  
Set the parameters for the four sides of the box.  
Number of images which can be  
saved / maximum number of images  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Left)  
2 (Right)  
3 (Top)  
Left edge position  
Right edge position  
Top edge position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
4 (Bottom) Bottom edge position –100.00 to +100.00  
(If you turned [Mask Link] on in step 1, the parameters  
for video side are shown.)  
To select frame memory output  
1
Press [FM Output].  
Note  
Saved freeze images are erased if you power off the  
switcher, or execute a reset with the setup menu. Freeze  
images which you do not want to erase must be saved as  
files to the hard disk or a “Memory Stick”. (See Chapter 7  
A popup window appears.  
File names  
• When you press [Store], a keyboard window appears,  
and the default file name, such as “image001” appears.  
To change this, enter the file name in the keyboard  
window. (Maximum eight alphanumeric characters)  
• For automatic saving, the file name is automatically set  
to “auto_000,” “auto_001,” and so on.  
2
Press one of the following.  
FM1 V/K: Frame memory 1 video and key  
FM2 V/K: Frame memory 2 video and key  
FM3 V/K: Frame memory 3 video and key  
Frame Memory  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
For example, if you select [FM2 V/K], the thumbnails  
in the Freeze menu (see page 120) change to [FM2V]  
and [FM2K].  
4
5
When [Pair] is turned off, press one of the output  
buttons, to select it for the operation.  
The selected button turns light blue.  
To delete a freeze image  
Press [Frz Off]. The thumbnails in the Freeze menu  
([FM1V] and [FM1K] in the figure on page 120) change to  
black.  
Do one of the following to select the image file to  
recall.  
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.  
• Press the list arrow buttons.  
Recalling Freeze Images Saved in  
Frame Memory  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description Setting values  
1 (No)  
File number 1 to number of saved image  
files  
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory >Recall.  
The Recall menu appears.  
Freeze image selection in the list is reflected in  
thumbnail selection, and vice versa.  
Output of selected frame memory  
6
7
If [Pair] is off, press the [Video] or [Key] thumbnail to  
select the target.  
The selected button turns light blue.  
Press [Recall].  
This recalls the freeze image, which appears in  
[FM1V] and/or [FM1K].  
Managing Image Files  
Renaming an image file  
Video  
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory >Rename.  
List of saved image files  
Key  
The Rename menu appears.  
Regardless of whether pair mode is on or off, all saved  
frame memory image files appear in the list.  
Thumbnails of saved freeze images  
(change with selection in the list)  
Names of the selected image files  
2
3
To change the frame memory output destination  
([FM1] in the above figure), press [FM Output].  
Press [Pair], turning it on/off.  
The selection for operation changes as follows.  
On: Only Pair files appear in the list, and the operation  
applies simultaneously to the video and key files.  
Off: The list shows both Pair files and Single files, and  
operations apply separately to the video and key  
files.  
2
Select the file to operate on.  
About Single files and Pair files, see “Saving files with  
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.  
• Press the arrow buttons to select from the list.  
122  
Frame Memory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• Turn the knob.  
The thumbnail button turns yellow. The file name in  
the list also turns yellow, indicating that this is the file  
to be affected.  
Knob  
Description Setting values  
1 (No) File number 1 to number of saved image  
files  
4
5
To delete more than one file, repeat steps 2 and 3 to  
select the files.  
For Pair files, the video and key files are selected  
together.  
It is not possible to select either individually.  
Press [Delete].  
A message appears, asking for confirmation of the  
deletion.  
3
4
Press [Rename].  
A popup window appears.  
6
To carry out the deletion press [Yes], and to cancel  
press [No].  
Enter the new name, and press [Enter].  
This renames the selected file.  
If you press [Yes], this deletes the file or files. The  
number of files that can be saved shown on the  
[Delete] button increases by the number of files  
deleted.  
Deleting an image file  
If you press [No], the system returns to the state before  
step 2.  
1
From the top menu, select Frame Memory >Delete.  
The Delete menu appears.  
Regardless of whether pair mode is on or off, all saved  
frame memory image files appear in the list.  
2
3
Select the file to be deleted.  
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.  
• Press the arrow buttons to select from the list.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description Setting values  
1 (No) File number 1 to number of saved image  
files  
• To select all files, press [Select All], turning it on.  
If you have selected [Select All], skip to step 5.  
Select either video or key.  
• To delete a video image file, press [Video] above the  
thumbnail.  
• To delete a key image file, press [Key] above the  
thumbnail.  
Frame Memory  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cross-point hold: When the snapshot is recalled, the  
1)  
cross-point button selection remains unchanged.  
The same setting is used for both A and B buses. Also,  
the same setting is used for both PGM and PST buses.  
Key disable: When the snapshot is recalled, the key  
settings (including key on/off states, if specified by  
Snapshots  
What are Snapshots?  
1)  
setup settings) remain unchanged. This can be set  
The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the  
various settings required to apply a particular effect to an  
image are saved in memory as a set of data, for recall as  
required, to recover the original state.  
independently for each keyer.  
Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the  
snapshot recall to the snapshot settings is carried out  
smoothly, by a dissolve.  
Snapshot operations use the Flexi Pad control block.  
Auto transition: An auto transition starts the instant the  
snapshot is recalled. The auto transition setting is valid  
for M/E and PGM/PST.  
Snapshot types  
There are two types of snapshot: those called simply  
“snapshot,” and effect snapshots. They differ in the types  
of data saved and the save destination registers (memory  
locations for saving data).  
1) There are three hold modes for key buses: Xpt Hold, Key Disable, and Key  
Disable with Status. Select one of the modes with the setup menu. See  
Usable temporary attributes  
The following table shows the temporary attributes which  
can be used in each region.  
Snapshots  
These are sets of data saved for each region (functional  
unit block) to enable recall of video states.  
Yes: Usable No: Not usable  
Snapshot target data and number of registers  
Attribute  
Region  
M/E  
Yes  
PGM/PST  
Yes  
MISC  
Yes  
No  
Target data  
Number of registers  
(register numbers)  
Cross-point hold  
Key disable  
M/E region data  
99 (1 to 99)  
99 (1 to 99)  
99 (1 to 99)  
Yes  
Yes  
PGM/PST region data  
Effect dissolve  
Auto transition  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Following data included in MISC  
regions  
Yes  
Yes  
• Color backgrounds  
• AUX 1 to 4  
Bus override  
Even when the setting of the temporary attribute “cross-  
point hold” is off, you can recall a snapshot while  
maintaining the current cross-point selection. This  
function is called “bus override.”  
Note  
In this version, PGM/PST and MISC data cannot be saved  
and recalled individually.  
On how to use the bus override function, see page 126.  
Effect snapshots  
These are sets of data saved to enable recall of M/E effect  
settings and PGM/PST wipe settings.  
Effect snapshot target data and number of registers  
Target data  
Number of registers  
(register numbers)  
Effect pattern numbers and  
modifiers set on M/E bank  
10 (1 to 10)  
Effect (wipe) pattern numbers and 10 (1 to 10)  
modifiers set on PGM/PST bank  
Snapshot attributes  
Temporary attributes  
When a snapshot is recalled, you can specify up to four  
additional attributes called “temporary attributes.” They  
are as follows.  
124  
Snapshots  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
5
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.  
Saving Snapshots  
The most significant digit in the numeric display  
shows the number of the selected bank.  
This is also indicated by the display on the memory  
recall buttons. For example, the display is as shown  
below when bank 3 is selected.  
3
2
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
37  
34  
31  
40  
38  
35  
32  
39  
36  
33  
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
STORE  
MCRO  
EFF  
DISS  
AUTO  
TRNS  
EFF  
DISS  
AUTO  
TRNS  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
6
7
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.  
The snapshot can now be saved.  
7
4
5,8  
6
Press the memory recall button corresponding to  
register in which you want to save the snapshot.  
1
2
Set up the state that you want to save as a snapshot.  
Press the [SNAPSHOT] button, turning it on.  
Note  
The Flexi Pad control block enters snapshot operation  
mode.  
The contents of the corresponding register are  
overwritten if you press a button which is lit in orange  
or yellow.  
3
4
Press and light the region selection button for the  
region which you want to save.  
The pressed button lights in yellow when the saving of  
the snapshot is finished.  
The numeric display shows the selected bank number,  
followed by the register number.  
For example, if you selected register 37, the display  
shows “3-37.”  
[M/E] button: Selects the M/E region.  
[PP/ALL] button: Selects all regions.  
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.  
The display on the memory recall buttons changes to  
the state shown in the above figure. You can now  
select the save destination bank.  
Banks are the 99 registers divided into 10 groups. The  
following table shows the correspondences bank  
numbers and register numbers.  
Bank number  
Bank 0  
Bank 1  
Bank 2  
Bank 3  
Bank 4  
Bank 5  
Bank 6  
Bank 7  
Bank 8  
Bank 9  
Register number  
1 to 10  
11 to 20  
21 to 30  
31 to 40  
41 to 50  
51 to 60  
61 to 70  
71 to 80  
81 to 90  
91 to 99  
Snapshots  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Flexi Pad control block  
Recalling Snapshots  
Temporary attribute  
Button pressed  
Auto transition  
[AUTO TRNS] button  
Lit in green: Selected  
Lit in orange: Not selected  
1
See page 124 for the attributes which may be used .  
7
4
1
0
8
9
6
3
Note  
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
The Cross-point hold and Key disable states last until  
the [XPT HOLD] or [XP/KY HOLD] button is pressed  
again.  
5
2
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
STORE  
MCRO  
5
Press the memory recall button for the register where  
the snapshot that you want is saved (the button is lit in  
orange).  
EFF  
DISS  
AUTO  
TRNS  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
When the recall is complete, the pressed button lights  
in yellow.  
2
3
4
The numeric display shows the bank number followed  
by the selected register number.  
To maintain cross-point states temporarily with  
the bus override function  
1
Press the [SNAPSHOT] button, turning it on.  
Recall the snapshot while holding down a cross-point  
button in the A or B row on the M/E bank or a cross-point  
button in the PGM or PST row on the PGM/PST bank.  
The snapshot is recalled without changing the selection of  
the signal on the bus. This operation is not necessary when  
cross-point hold is on.  
The button lights in amber, and the Flexi Pad control  
block enter snapshot operation mode.  
Also, the numeric display shows the number of the  
bank selected last time, and the number of the register  
most recently recalled for the region.  
2
3
If the [STORE] button is lit, press the button, turning  
it off.  
Deleting Snapshots  
Select the bank to recall.  
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [STORE]  
button, turning it on.  
See steps 4 and 5 of “Saving Snapshots” (page 125).  
While holding down the [SNAPSHOT] button, press  
the memory recall button for the snapshot that you  
want to delete.  
4
If you want to use a temporary attribute (see page  
124), press one of the following buttons, selecting and  
lighting it.  
The button goes out after the snapshot is deleted.  
M/E and PGM/PST cross-point control blocks, AUX  
bus control block  
Temporary attribute  
Button pressed  
Cross-point hold  
[XPT HOLD] button in M/E  
and PGM/PST cross-point  
control blocks  
Cross-point hold or key  
disable for key bus  
[XP/KY HOLD] button in  
AUX bus control block  
Cross-point hold for Aux  
bus  
Flexi Pad control block  
Temporary attribute  
Button pressed  
Effect dissolve  
[EFF DISS] button  
126  
Snapshots  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Control block  
Event  
Macros  
Menu control block  
Disk recorder/Extended VTR file  
recalling  
a) Not found on 1 M/E panel.  
b) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key, the key state at the time  
of event registration (inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro.  
When the macro is executed, the event is only replayed if the key state  
matches the saved state. (Example: For a macro with an event that deletes  
a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted it is deleted, but  
otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying.)  
c) The operations of buttons to which one of Device 1 to Device 6, All Stop,  
Shuttle, Jog, Rec, Mcro Only Set, Mcro AT with Rate, or Mcro AT with  
A/B is assigned are excluded.  
What Are Macros?  
The term “macro” refers to the function whereby a  
sequence of signal selections and other operations on the  
control panel is saved as data in memory, so that it can be  
recalled as required to automatically execute the same  
sequence of operations.  
d) Not found on 1.5 M/E panel.  
Macro operations use the Flexi Pad control block.  
Pause event  
To adjust the execution timing of a particular event (to  
delay the start of execution of the event by a particular time  
interval), you can store a special event which pauses macro  
execution. This event is called a “pause event.” When you  
store a pause event, you can set the interval for which the  
macro is paused (the pause duration) to any value in the  
range 1 to 999 frames. When the set time has elapsed, the  
macro is automatically executed.  
Macro registers  
The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a “macro  
register.” There are 99 macro registers, numbered 1 to 99.  
Events  
The individual control panel operations constituting a  
macro are termed “events.” One macro can contain a  
maximum of 99 events.  
Pause zero event  
The following table shows the operations for each control  
block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a  
macro.  
By including a pause event with the time set to zero, you  
can make macro execution pause at the pause event.  
Control block  
Event  
Creating a New Macro  
M/E cross-point control Cross-point selection  
block  
PGM/PST cross-point Cross-point selection  
control block  
4,10  
1
AUX bus control block Cross-point selection  
M/E transition control  
block  
Auto transition execution  
Cut execution  
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
Transition type selection  
Next transition selection  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
b) d)  
Key On/Off  
STORE  
MCRO  
PGM/PST transition  
Transition type selection  
Auto transition execution  
Cut execution  
a)  
control block  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
b)  
b)  
M/E key transition  
control block  
Auto transition execution  
b)  
Key On/Off  
2
3,5,6,7,8  
Downstream key/fade  
to black control block  
Auto transition execution  
b)  
Key On/Off  
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]  
button, turning it on.  
Fade to black execution  
Flexi Pad control block Recalling the following data  
• Snapshots  
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro  
operation.  
• Effect snapshots  
Utility control block  
Recalling the functions assigned to  
c)  
buttons  
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.  
Macros  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
a) XX: The number of the register containing a macro being created or  
edited.  
The display on the memory recall buttons changes to  
the state shown in the above figure. You can now  
select the save destination bank.  
6
7
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button to toggle the  
auto insert mode on or off (see the next item).  
For details of the correspondence between banks and  
Create the events (carry out the control panel  
operations to be registered as events in the macro).  
3
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.  
You can include pause events (see page 129).  
The most significant digit in the numeric display  
shows the number of the selected bank.  
Each memory recall button shows the corresponding  
register number and register status for the selected  
bank.  
Lit orange: Register holding macro data  
Lit yellow: Last recalled register  
Off: Empty register  
For details of events that can be registered, see page  
127.  
• When auto insert mode is on, execution of a control  
panel operation automatically registers an event in  
the macro.  
• When auto insert mode is off, proceed to step 8.  
4
5
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.  
Note  
During macro creation or editing, if you press any of  
the mode selection buttons other than the [MCRO]  
button ([TRANSRATE] button, and so on), the  
executed operation is also registered as an event. In  
this case, the [MCRO] button stays lit red. To return to  
macro edit mode from this state, press the [MCRO]  
button.  
Press the memory recall button showing the register  
number to be registered.  
The Flexi Pad control block enters macro edit mode,  
and the [MCRO] button lights in red.  
The memory recall buttons change as shown below.  
AUTO  
INS  
STOR  
01  
EXIT  
PAUS  
INS  
8
9
When auto insert mode is off, press the [INS] button to  
register the event.  
ALL  
DEL  
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to register the required events in  
the macro.  
MOD  
This registers the events in the macro, in the order the  
operations were carried out on the control panel.  
The numeric display appears as follows.  
<<  
PREV  
>>  
NEXT  
Button name  
Function  
Example:  
Total number of events  
INS  
Add a new event after the current  
event.  
Current event number  
MOD  
DEL  
Modify an event.  
Delete the current event, or delete all  
events within a macro register (when  
the [ALL] button is turned on).  
10Press the [STORE] button or memory recall button  
PAUS  
ALL  
Enter pause duration input mode.  
[STOR XX] (where XX is the register number).  
Specify all events within a macro  
register as editing targets.  
This saves the created macro in the register, and the  
Flexi Pad control block returns to the state before  
macro editing began. The [MCRO] button lights  
amber.  
EXIT  
Exit macro edit mode without saving  
the edited macro.  
AUTO INS  
Enter auto insert mode.  
Switching auto insert mode on or off  
In the auto insert mode, when creating or editing a macro,  
an operation carried out on the control panel is  
automatically registered as an event.  
By pressing the [AUTO INS] button, turning it in green,  
the auto insert mode is on.  
a)  
Exit macro edit mode after saving the  
edited macro.  
STOR XX  
<< PREV  
>> NEXT  
Go to the previous event.  
Go to the next event.  
128  
Macros  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the [AUTO INS] button lights in orange (this mode  
is off), it is necessary to press the [INS] button for each  
operation to register the event.  
To include all information associated with an  
operation when registering a macro event  
When registering an auto transition operation as an event,  
you can register the auto transition event to include the  
transition rate and background A/B bus selection status.  
To use this capability, assign the following functions to  
buttons in the utility control block, and turn the relevant  
button on before you start an event to register.  
Note  
When you start macro creation or editing with the macro  
execution mode set to “Normal” (see page 175), the auto  
insert mode is automatically on. When “Step” is selected  
as the macro execution mode, the auto insert mode is  
automatically off.  
Macro AT with Rate (Macro Auto Trans Event with/  
without Rate): When registering an auto transition  
macro event, include the transition rate.  
Macro AT with A/B Bus (Macro Auto Trans Event  
with/without A/B Bus): When registering an auto  
transition macro event in the transition control block,  
include the background A/B bus cross-point.  
Creating a pause event  
To create a pause event, use the following procedure.  
1
Press the memory recall button [PAUS].  
For details of the method of assigning these functions to  
The Flexi Pad control block enters pause duration  
input mode, and the memory recall buttons appear as  
in the following figure.  
Recalling a Macro Register and  
Executing a Macro  
7
4
1
0
8
5
9
6
3
There are two macro execution modes.  
Normal execution mode: When execution of an event is  
completed, the next event is executed automatically.  
Step execution mode: When execution of an event is  
completed, macro execution is paused.  
2
PAUS  
ENTR  
CLR  
You can switch the normal execution mode and step  
execution mode in the Setup menu. See “Macro Execution  
2
3
Enter the pause duration (0 to 999 (frames)).  
When a macro is paused at a pause zero event or when a  
macro is paused in step execution mode, restarting such  
macro is referred to as a “macro take operation.”  
If you set the duration to “0,” macro execution will be  
paused at the position of this pause event.  
Press the [PAUS ENTR] button.  
This sets the pause duration, and inserts the pause  
event.  
appearance The appearance of the memory recall  
buttons returns to the before execution of step 1.  
Events requiring adjustment when creating a  
macro  
The following event requires time for execution to  
complete, and therefore when executed within a macro  
sequence, a pause event must be inserted to adjust the  
timing.  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR cue up  
For a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back, for  
example, a pause event must be inserted between the cue  
up event and the playback event.  
Macros  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Executing a macro in normal execution  
mode  
Notes  
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a  
time.  
• During macro execution, recalling the same register  
again stops the macro being executed.  
• ·Individual events stored in a macro are executed  
according to the settings in setup. If you change the  
settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the  
expected effect.  
• During macro execution, if you switch the control panel  
to macro edit mode, the macro being executed stops.  
• During macro editing it is not possible to execute a  
macro.  
• If you start execution of a macro by operating a button  
for which a macro attachment is set, then before the end  
of execution of that macro you cannot recall and execute  
a separate macro from the Flexi Pad control block.  
1
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF/  
WIPE  
M/E  
PP/  
ALL  
SNAP  
SHOT  
STORE  
MCRO  
BANK  
SEL  
TRANS  
RATE  
Executing a macro with pause zero events  
set  
When execution of a macro is paused, the memory recall  
button [TAKE] is lit in orange.  
2
3,4  
1
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]  
button, turning it on.  
To restart the macro execution, press the [TAKE] button.  
This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro  
operation.  
Executing a macro in step execution mode  
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, recall the macro  
register.  
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.  
The display on the memory recall buttons changes to  
the state shown in the above figure. You can now  
select the save destination bank.  
For details of recalling macro registers, see  
130).  
For details of the correspondence between banks and  
The memory recall buttons are assigned to the display  
of the [TAKE] button and macro execution status, as  
in the following figure.  
3
4
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.  
The most significant digit in the numeric display  
shows the number of the selected bank.  
Each memory recall button shows the corresponding  
register number and register status for the selected  
bank.  
Lit orange: Register holding macro data  
Lit yellow: Last recalled register  
Off: Empty register  
7
4
8
5
2
9
6
1
3
03  
/05  
10  
TAKE  
Press the memory recall button showing the register  
number to be recalled.  
TAKE button  
Status display (Number of events  
executed/total number of events)  
The button you pressed lights yellow, the macro  
register is recalled, and the macro is executed.  
During macro execution, the button you pressed  
remains yellow, but flashes. When macro execution  
completes, it returns to permanently on.  
2
Press the [TAKE] button.  
This executes one event within the macro, then stops.  
The numeric display shows the bank number followed  
by the selected register number.  
130  
Macros  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The number of events executed, as shown in the  
memory recall button, is incremented by one.  
• When auto insert mode is off, proceed to step 4.  
For details of events that can be registered, see page  
127.  
3
Repeat step 2, executing the macro event by event.  
When all events in the macro have been executed, the  
[TAKE] button goes off.  
4
When auto insert mode is off, press the memory recall  
button [INS].  
This adds the new event after the event specified in  
step 1.  
Editing a Macro  
After carrying out macro editing, be sure to carry out a  
save operation (see page 132).  
Modifying an event  
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)  
Specifying an edit point  
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button to toggle the  
auto insert mode on or off.  
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]  
button, turning it on.  
3
4
Carry out the event you want to modify on the control  
panel.  
2
3
4
5
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.  
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.  
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.  
Press the memory recall button [MOD].  
This modifies the event at the specified edit point as  
carried out in step 3.  
Press the memory recall button showing the register  
number to be edited.  
Deleting an event  
The Flexi Pad control block enters macro edit mode,  
and the [MCRO] button lights in red.  
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)  
Press the memory recall button [DEL].  
For details of the function assignment to the memory  
recall buttons in macro edit mode, see step 5 in  
This deletes the event specified in step 1.  
6
Specify the edit point by the following operation.  
Deleting all events within a macro register  
• To move the edit point to the event immediately  
following the current macro event (the macro event  
specified as the current edit point), press the [>>  
NEXT] button.  
• To move the edit point to the event immediately  
preceding the current macro event, press the [<<  
PREV] button.  
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)  
Press the memory recall button [ALL], lighting it  
green.  
3
Press the memory recall button [DEL].  
This deletes all events within the register.  
Inserting an event  
Merging a macro for which a macro  
attachment is set  
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See previous item.)  
If required, press the [AUTO INS] button to toggle the  
auto insert mode on or off.  
1
2
Specify the edit point. (See page 131.)  
Press the memory recall button [AUTO INS] to toggle  
the auto insert mode on or off.  
3
Carry out the event to be added on the control panel.  
You can include pause events (see page 129).  
• When auto insert mode is on, execution of a control  
panel operation automatically registers an event in  
the macro.  
3
Press a button for which a macro attachment is set.  
The macro in the register assigned to the button is  
merged with the macro being edited.  
Macros  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
However, the macro assigned to the button is not  
executed.  
For a button whose function is switched by delegation, you  
can make a separate macro attachment for each function.  
You can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings.  
The macro attachment setting is possible for the following  
bus buttons. For button locations, see pages in parentheses.  
Saving a Macro  
Press the [STORE] button or memory recall button [STOR  
XX] (where XX is the register number) to save the edited  
macro in a register.  
Control block  
Button  
M/E cross-point control block Cross-point buttons (page  
PGM/PST cross-point control Cross-point buttons (page  
To return to the state before editing, without  
saving the macro editing results  
a)  
block  
Press the memory recall button [EXIT] to recall the same  
register again. This returns to the state before editing,  
without saving the macro editing results.  
AUX bus control block  
Cross-point buttons (page  
M/E transition control block  
[AUTO TRANS] button (page  
[CUT] button (page 17)  
Deleting a Macro  
Transition type selection  
buttons (page 17)  
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [MCRO]  
button.  
[KEY1 ON] to [KEY2 ON]  
b) c)  
buttons  
2
3
4
5
Press the [BANK SEL] button, turning it on.  
Press a memory recall button to select a bank.  
Press the [STORE] button, turning it on.  
Next transition selection  
buttons (page 17)  
PGM/PST transition control Transition type selection  
a)  
buttons (page 18)  
block  
[AUTO TRANS] button (page  
Hold down the [MCRO] button, and then press the the  
memory recall button showing the corresponding  
register number.  
[CUT] button (page 18)  
b)  
M/E key transition control  
block  
[AUTO TRANS] button  
The button you pressed goes off, and this deletes the  
macro.  
The [STORE] button goes off.  
[KEY1 ON] to [KEY2 ON]  
buttons (page 18)  
c)  
b)  
Downstream key/fade to  
black control block  
[AUTO TRANS] button  
Using Macro Attachment  
[DSK1 ON] to [DSK2 ON]  
buttons (page 19)  
c)  
Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register  
is assigned to a control panel button, linking the execution  
of the button function with a macro execution.  
Select one of the following three linking modes to make  
the macro attachment.  
Pre macro: Mode in which the button function is executed  
after macro execution has completed  
Post macro: Mode in which the macro is executed after  
carrying out the button function  
[FTB] button (page 18)  
Utility control block  
DEVICE/UTILITY operation  
d)  
buttons (page 22)  
ENABLE/UTILITY operation  
d)  
buttons (page 22)  
a) Not found on 1 M/E panel.  
b) When you attach macros to buttons that turn independent key transitions  
on and off, operations which go from on to off are distinguished from  
operations which go from off to on. For example, if you attach a macro to  
an operation which uses a button to go from on to off, the macro is not  
executed when you press the same button to go from off to on.  
c) Not found on 1.5 M/E panel.  
Macro only: Mode in which the button function is not  
executed, and the macro only is executed  
d) Excluding the buttons to which one of Device 1 to Device 6, All Stop,  
Shuttle, Jog, Rec, Mcro Only Set, Mcro AT with Rate, or Mcro AT with  
A/B is assigned.  
The selection of pre or post macro mode is carried out in  
the macro control block. For macro only mode, assign the  
selection function to a utility control block button, and  
make the selection by pressing the button.  
Setting a macro attachment  
You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a  
button.  
See above for the buttons for which a macro attachment  
can be set.  
132  
Macros  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1
2
Recall the macro register you want to assign to the  
button.  
• Buttons set in post macro mode: flash amber  
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green  
If you set a macro attachment for an already  
macro attached button  
It results in either of the following.  
When the new setting is made in the same macro  
attachment mode as for the old setting: Both old and  
new settings are invalid.  
For details of the method of operation, see “Executing  
To set in macro only mode, press the button to which  
[Mcro Only Set] is assigned, turning it on.  
To set in pre or post macro mode, proceed to step 3.  
When the new setting is made in a different macro  
attachment mode from the old setting: The new  
setting is valid.  
Note  
To set in macro only mode, it is first necessary to  
assign the “Macro Only Set” function to the buttons in  
the utility control block. Carry out this assignment in  
the Setup/Diag >Operation >Utility menu. For details,  
Note  
After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in  
the cross-point control block, if in the Setup menu you  
change the function assignment to the button, the macro  
attachment setting disappears.  
3
Depending on the macro attachment mode you want to  
set, carry out any of the following operations in the  
macro control block.  
Removing macro attachment settings  
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or [POST MCRO]  
button, and press a button that is flashing. The button for  
which the macro attachment is set stops flashing and goes  
off, and this removes the setting. (See above.)  
Pre macro: Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button, and  
press the desired button.  
Post macro: Hold down the [POST MCRO] button,  
and press the desired button.  
Macro only: Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or  
[POST MCRO] button, and press the desired  
button.  
Executing a macro by macro attachment  
1
2
Press the [ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it on.  
Press the desired button for which a macro attachment  
has been set.  
MACRO  
This recalls the macro register assigned to the button,  
and the macro is executed as follows, according to the  
operation mode.  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
Pre macro mode: The macro is executed first, and  
then the button function is executed.  
Post macro mode: The button function is executed  
first, and then the macro is executed.  
ATTCH ENBL button  
POST MCRO button  
PRE MCRO button  
Macro only mode: The button function is not  
executed, and the macro only is executed.  
The button you pressed flashes, and the register you  
recalled in step 1 is assigned to the button. (When you  
set in macro only mode, the button to which [Mcro  
Only Set] is assigned goes off.)  
• Buttons set in pre- or post-macro mode: flash amber  
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green  
Notes  
• It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a  
time. Therefore, even if you simultaneously press  
multiple buttons for which macro attachments are set,  
only one macro is executed.  
• During macro execution, recalling the same register  
again stops the macro being executed. Therefore,  
pressing twice a button for which a macro attachment is  
set stops the macro being executed.  
• Individual events stored in a macro are executed  
according to the settings in setup. If you change the  
settings in setup, a saved macro may not have the  
expected effect.  
To check macro attachment settings  
Hold down the [PRE MCRO] button or [POST MCRO]  
button. While it is held down, buttons for which macro  
attachments are set flash as follows.  
While the [PRE MCRO] button is held down:  
• Buttons set in pre macro mode: flash amber  
• Buttons set in macro only mode: flash green  
While the [POST MCRO] button is held down:  
Macros  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• During macro execution, if you switch the Flexi Pad  
control block to macro edit mode, the macro being  
executed stops.  
• During macro editing, pressing a button for which a  
macro attachment is set does not execute the macro.  
Safe Title  
Safe title is a function which allows you to check whether  
that text you add with keys falls within the effective  
reception area of television receivers, which is indicated  
by a box marker appearing on the monitor screen. This  
function also allows you to display a cross marker which  
indicates the center of the screen.  
To disable macro attachment settings  
Press the [ATTCH ENBL] button, turning it off.  
In this state, pressing a button for which a macro  
attachment is set does not execute the macro.  
information about marker types and other safe settings.  
Displaying safe title markers with a menu  
operation  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Enable/Safe Title.  
The Enable/Safe Title menu appears.  
2
Press [Safe Title].  
Safe title markers appear.  
Displaying safe title markers with a button  
operation  
Press [SAFE TITLE] in the ENABLE/UTILITY operation  
button row on the control panel.  
information about how to assign the safe title on/off  
command to the [SAFE TITLE] button.  
134  
Safe Title  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying  
Copy Operation Targets  
You can copy setting states between the following four  
keyers.  
Setup data and key memory data is not copied.  
• M/E key 1  
• M/E key 2  
• Downstream key 1 (DSK1)  
• Downstream key 2 (DSK2)  
Using Buttons to Copy Key Settings  
You can easily copy keyer settings by using the AUX  
delegation buttons ([KEY1], [KEY2], [DSK1], and  
[DSK2]) in the AUX bus control block to specify the copy  
source and copy destination.  
Example: Copying M/E key 1 to M/E key 2  
In the AUX bus control block (see page 15), hold down the  
[KEY 1] delegation button and press the [KEY 2] button.  
A beep sounds and the copy is executed.  
Copying  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
136  
Copying  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Operations  
Chapter  
Overview  
Batch Operating on Data  
Files  
You can save register data, including setup data and  
snapshot data, and load the saved data whenever it is  
needed. Data can be saved to either the built-in hard disk  
or a “Memory Stick” (see page 24) as a file.  
The system distinguishes between several different kinds  
of data.  
• Setup data (including data on the states of system  
devices after system power on and key memory setting  
data)  
Use the File >All menu to operate on data in all categories  
(except frame memory image data).  
Saving All Data at Once  
1
From the top menu, select File >All.  
The All menu appears.  
• Snapshot setting data  
• Effect snapshot setting data  
• Frame memory image data (image data saved using the  
frame memory function)  
You can do the following with data in the above  
categories.  
• Save, load, and delete all data in all categories (except  
frame memory image data) in a single operation.  
• Save, load, and delete all data in selected categories  
(except frame memory image data) in a single operation.  
• Save, load, delete, rename, and copy files containing  
frame memory image data.  
2
Press [Target Dir].  
Notes  
• Data saved to hard disk may become unavailable if  
trouble occurs on the hard disk. It is recommended that  
important data be backed up to “Memory Sticks.”  
• Before saving data to a “Memory Stick” or loading or  
deleting data from a “Memory Stick,” insert the  
“Memory Stick” into the system's “Memory Stick” slot.  
A popup window appears.  
Overview / Batch Operating on Data Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
                   
“1 SYSTEM” is specified as the target directory. (No  
other directory can be selected.)  
To cancel a load after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the save has been cancelled.  
3
Press the button for the desired media type (Hard Disk,  
or Memory Stick).  
The color of the pressed button is inverted.  
Deleting All Data at Once  
You can delete the data of all categories saved in files in a  
single operation.  
4
5
Press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
1
(see page 137), to select the type of media storing the  
data you want to delete.  
In the File >All menu, press [All Save].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the save.  
2
In the File >All menu, press [All Delete].  
6
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
save, or [No] to cancel it.  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the deletion.  
If you pressed [Yes], the save begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
Note that all existing files in the save destination are  
deleted before the save starts.  
3
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
deletion, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the deletion begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
To cancel a save after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the save has been cancelled.  
To cancel the data deletion after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the deletion has been cancelled.  
Loading All Data at Once  
You can load the data of all categories saved in files to  
registers in a single operation.  
Note  
Data cannot be loaded from files created or saved on  
systems other than the MFS-2000.  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 4 in “Saving All Data at Once”  
(see page 137), to select the type of media storing the  
data you want to load.  
2
In the File >All menu, press [All Load].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the load.  
3
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
load, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the load begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
Note that all existing data in the load destination  
registers are deleted before the load starts.  
138  
Batch Operating on Data Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4
5
When you are finished selecting categories, press  
[OK].  
Batch Operating on Data  
Files of Selected  
Categories  
The popup window closes.  
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Target Dir].  
A popup window opens, in the same way as in step 2  
“1 SYSTEM” is specified as the target directory. (No  
other directory can be selected.)  
Use the File >All (Selected) menu to operate on data in  
selected categories (except frame memory image data).  
6
Press the button for the desired media type (Hard Disk,  
or Memory Stick).  
Saving the Data of Selected  
Categories  
The color of the pressed button is inverted.  
You can save the data for one or more categories in a single  
operation.  
7
8
Press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
1
From the top menu, select File >All (Selected).  
The All (Selected) menu appears.  
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Save].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the save.  
9
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
save, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the save begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
Note that all existing files in the save destination are  
deleted before the save starts.  
To cancel a save after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the save has been cancelled.  
In the Target Category area, the names of the currently  
selected categories are displayed in reverse video.  
2
To change the category selection, press [Category  
Sel].  
Loading the Data of Selected  
Categories  
A popup window appears.  
You can load the data for one or more categories to  
registers in a single operation.  
1
Categories” (see page 139), to select the target  
categories and the type of media storing the data you  
want to load.  
2
3
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Load].  
The buttons for the currently selected categories are on  
(their color is inverted).  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the load.  
3
Press the button for the category that you want to select  
(multiple selections possible). To deselect a category,  
press the corresponding (on) button, turning it off.  
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
load, or [No] to cancel it.  
Batch Operating on Data Files of Selected Categories  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
If you pressed [Yes], the load begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
Note that all existing data in the load destination  
registers are deleted before the load starts.  
Operating on Individual  
Data Files  
To cancel a load after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the save has been cancelled.  
You can save, load, delete, rename, and copy files  
containing frame memory image data.  
Loading Data Files  
Deleting the Data of Selected  
Categories  
Proceed as follows to load files containing frame memory  
image data to registers.  
You can delete the data for one or more categories saved  
in files in a single operation.  
1
From the top menu, select File >Load.  
The Load menu appears.  
1
Carry out steps 1 to 7 of “Saving the Data of Selected  
Categories” (see page 139), to select the target  
categories and the type of media storing the data you  
want to delete.  
2
3
In the File >All (Selected) menu, press [Delete].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the deletion.  
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
deletion, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the deletion begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
The media, directory, files, and registers used in the  
previous load operation appear in the status area.  
To cancel the data deletion after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the deletion has been cancelled.  
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required  
the target media.  
For details about the procedure, see “Common  
3
4
In the File >Load menu, press [Source File].  
A file list appears in a popup window.  
Do one of the following to select the files to load.  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start File) Number of first file to  
load  
1 and upwards  
2 (Number) Number of files to load 1 and upwards  
5
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].  
140  
Operating on Individual Data Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The popup window closes.  
6
7
In the File >Load menu, press [Dest Register].  
A list of destination registers appears in a popup  
window.  
Do one of the following to select the destination  
registers.  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knobs.  
The media, directory, files, and registers used in the  
previous save operation appear in the status area.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start Reg) Number of first  
destination register  
1 and upwards  
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required  
the target media.  
2 (Number) Number of destination 1 and upwards  
registers  
For details about the procedure, see “Common  
8
9
When you are finished selecting registers, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
3
4
To change the save source registers, press [Source  
Reg] in the File >Save menu.  
In the File >Load menu, press [Load].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the load.  
A register list appears in a popup window.  
Do one of the following to select the registers to save.  
10Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
load, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the load begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
Note that all existing files in the destination registers  
are deleted before the load begins.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start Reg) Number of first register 1 and upwards  
to save  
To cancel a load after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the load has been cancelled.  
2 (Number) Number of registers to 1 and upwards  
save  
5
6
7
When you are finished selecting registers, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
Saving Data Files  
You can save frame memory image data that has been  
loaded into registers to files on the desired type of media  
(hard disk or “Memory Stick”).  
In the File >Save menu, press [Dest File].  
A list of destination files appears in a popup window.  
Do one of the following to select the destination files.  
See the previous section “Loading Data Files” for more  
information about how to load frame memory image data  
files.  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
1
From the top menu, select File >Save.  
The Save menu appears.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start File) Number of first  
destination file  
1 and upwards  
Operating on Individual Data Files  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Do one of the following to select the files to delete.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Number) Number of destination 1 and upwards  
files  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
8
9
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start File) Number of first file to  
delete  
1 and upwards  
In the File >Save menu, press [Save].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the save.  
2 (Number) Number of files to  
delete  
1 and upwards  
5
6
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
10Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
load, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the save begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
In the File >Delete menu, press [Delete].  
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the deletion.  
To cancel a save after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the save has been cancelled.  
7
Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
deletion, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the deletion begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
Deleting Data Files  
Proceed as follows to delete frame memory image data  
files.  
To cancel a file deletion after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the deletion has been cancelled.  
1
From the top menu, select File >Delete.  
The Delete menu appears.  
Renaming Data Files  
Proceed as follows to rename a frame memory image data  
file.  
1
From the top menu, select File >Rename.  
The Rename menu appears.  
The media, directory, and files used in the previous  
delete operation appear in the status area.  
2
3
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required  
the target media.  
For details about the procedure, see “Common  
The media, directory, and files used in the previous  
rename operation appear in the status area.  
In the File >Delete menu, press [Target File].  
A file list appears in a popup window.  
142  
Operating on Individual Data Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required  
the target media.  
The media, directory, and files used in the previous  
copy operation appear in the status area.  
For details about the procedure, see “Common  
2
Select the Frame Memory category, and as required  
the target media.  
For details about the procedure, see “Common  
3
4
In the File >Rename menu, press [Target File].  
A file list appears in a popup window.  
3
4
In the File >Copy menu, press [Source File].  
Do one of the following to select the file to rename.  
A list of copy source files appears in a popup window.  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Do one of the following to select the copy source files.  
• Turn the knob.  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start No) Number of file to  
rename  
1 and upwards  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
5
6
7
When you are finished selecting the file, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
1 (Start File) Number of first copy  
source file  
1 and upwards  
2 (Number) Number of copy source 1 and upwards  
files  
In the File >Rename menu, press [Rename].  
5
6
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
A keyboard window (see page 36) appears.  
Enter the desired file name in the keyboard window  
(maximum length 8 characters) and press [Enter].  
If you want to copy the files to a different type of  
media, execute steps 3 and 4 in “Common Operations  
Note  
You cannot use the following characters in file names.  
space \ / : ; , (comma) . (period) < > * ? “ |  
7
8
In the File >Copy menu, press [Dest File].  
Copying Data Files  
A list of destination files appears in a popup window.  
Proceed as follows to copy frame memory image data files.  
Do one of the following to select the copy destination  
files.  
1
From the top menu, select File >Copy.  
The Copy menu appears.  
• Press directly on the list in the popup window.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Start File) Number of first copy  
destination file  
1 and upwards  
2 (Number) Number of copy  
destination files  
1 and upwards  
9
When you are finished selecting files, press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
10In the File >Copy menu, press [Copy].  
Operating on Individual Data Files  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A confirmation window appears asking if you want to  
execute the copy.  
11Press [Yes] in the confirmation window to execute the  
copy, or [No] to cancel it.  
If you pressed [Yes], the copy begins and a window  
opens to show its progress.  
To cancel a file copy after it has started  
Press [Cancel] in the progress window, and press [OK]  
in the message box which appears to inform you that  
the copy has been cancelled.  
Common Operations – Selecting the  
Frame Memory Category and the  
Target Media  
With a file operation menu displayed, proceed as follows.  
1
2
3
Press [Category Sel].  
A popup window appears.  
Select [Frame Memory], and press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
To change the media selection from the current  
selection to the other type, press one of the following  
buttons, depending on the file operation.  
File  
operation  
Media to select  
Button to  
press  
Load  
Save  
Load source media  
[Source Dir]  
[Dest Dir]  
Save destination  
media  
Delete  
Rename  
Copy  
Media where target file [Target Dir]  
is saved  
Media where target file [Target Dir]  
is saved  
Copy source media  
[Source Dir]  
[Dest Dir]  
Copy destination  
media  
A popup window opens.  
“1 SYSTEM” is specified as the target directory. (No  
other directory can be selected.).  
4
Press the button for the desired media type (Hard Disk  
or Memory Stick), and press [OK].  
The popup window closes.  
144  
Operating on Individual Data Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
External Device  
Operations  
Chapter  
Preparations  
Control From Editing  
Systems  
The following preparations must be made to control the  
MFS-2000 system from an external editing system.  
Preparations on the MFS-2000 side  
Overview  
To use 9-pin serial control signals  
Enable the switcher editor mode by doing one of the  
following.  
• Press the [EDIT] button in the ENABLE/UTILITY  
operation button row on the control panel, turning it on.  
• Set with a menu.  
You can control the MFS-2000 system from an external  
editing system by using 9-pin serial control signals and  
GPI signals.  
Refer to the documentation of your editing system for more  
information about operations on the editing system.  
To set with a menu, proceed as follows.  
Controllable Functions  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Enable/Safe Title.  
The Enable/Safe Title menu appears.  
When using 9-pin serial control signals  
Following is a list of the functions which can be controlled  
via the EDITOR connector on the rear panel of the  
processor.  
• Signal selection  
• Specification of effect pattern numbers  
• Specification of transition directions (normal or reverse)  
• Specification of transition rates  
• Execution of auto transitions  
• Saving snapshots (store) and recalling snapshots  
When using GPI signals  
Following is a list of the main functions which can be  
controlled via the GPI connector on the rear panel of the  
processor.  
• Auto transitions  
• Cuts  
• Key mix transition  
• Key on and off  
2
Press [Editor Port], and set it to Enable.  
To use GPI signals  
• Press the [GPI] button in the ENABLE/UTILITY  
operation button row on the control panel, turning it on.  
Alternatively, press [SWR GPI] in the Enable/Safe Title  
menu, and set it to Enable.  
• In the Setup/Diag >GPI >SWR GPI In menu, set the  
functions to be executed by GPI input signals. (See “GPI  
Control From Editing Systems  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Note  
If you need to change the assignment of signals to cross-  
point buttons, do as follows.  
• In the Xpt Assign menu (see page 158), make  
assignments so that button numbers and pair numbers  
are all the same.  
Controlling External  
Devices  
• In the Video/Key Pair Assign menu (see page 159),  
change the signals assigned to pair numbers.  
Overview  
On the MFS-2000 system, you can control the following  
external devices from the RS-422A 9-pin serial interface  
of a Device Control Unit (DCU).  
Preparations on the editing system side  
Set the GPI signal pulse width to 1 field (frame) or more  
depending on the video format.  
• VTRs  
• Disk recorders (supporting Sony Disk 9-pin protocol)  
• Disk recorders (supporting the Video Disk  
Communications Protocol)  
• Extended VTRs (Abekas A53 protocol)  
• Audio mixers (control from editing keyboard only)  
To control external devices, one of the following DCU  
systems is required.  
MKS-2700: Six RS-422A ports (standard equipment).  
MKS-8700 (with optional MKS-8702 boards installed):  
Up to five boards may be installed, with each board  
providing six RS-422A ports (maximum 30 ports).  
To control external devices, assign them to arbitrary RS-  
422A 9-pin serial interface ports.  
See page 187 for more information about how to make  
device assignments.  
Manual VTR/Disk Recorder/  
Extended VTR Operations  
You can perform the following operations manually.  
• Select VTRs, disk recorders, and Extended VTRs  
• Play  
• Stop  
• Perform jog and shuttle mode search  
• Set start points  
• Cue up devices  
• Record to VTRs and disk recorders  
To perform operations manually, commands must be  
assigned to buttons in the utility control block.  
See page 170 for more information about how to assign  
commands to buttons in the utility control block.  
To play video from a disk recorder or Extended VTR, you  
need to read the files to play. To record to a disk recorder,  
you need to create the files to record.  
For details, see the procedure described in “Disk  
146  
Controlling External Devices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
The All Stop button, as assigned in the Utility menu, also  
flashes in amber when any of the devices assigned to the  
Device1 to Device6 selection buttons is cued up, and  
changes to lit in green when ends for all devices.  
Selecting devices to control  
Select devices to control by pressing the Device1 to  
Device6 selection buttons in the utility control block.  
You can select several devices. In this case, the device  
corresponding to the button which was pressed first  
becomes the reference device.  
The button of the reference device lights in green. Manual  
operation buttons, assigned in the utility control block,  
light and go out according to the state of the reference  
device.  
Recording to VTRs/disk recorders/  
Extended VTRs  
With the Rec button held down, press the Play button (both  
buttons as assigned in the Utility menu).  
During recording, the Rec button lights in red and the Play  
button lights in amber.  
Playing VTRs/disk recorders/Extended  
VTRs  
Notes  
• Recording is not possible to Extended VTRs.  
• Recording is not possible to VTRs and disk recorders  
unless they are set to Recorder.  
Press the Play button, as assigned in the Utility menu.  
During play, the button lights in amber.  
To change the speed, set a variable speed.  
• Recording start and end points cannot be set.  
• To record to disk recorders using the Video Disk  
Communications Protocol, set the disk recorder to  
Recorder.  
For more information about setting variable speeds, see  
the procedure described in “Checking VTR, Disk  
Notes about recording to disk recorders  
• Recording is not possible unless a new file name is  
assigned.  
Stopping VTRs/disk recorders/Extended  
VTRs  
Press the Stop button, as assigned in the Utility menu.  
The button lights in amber while the VTR/disk recorder/  
Extended VTR is stopped.  
To stop all devices that can be selected with the Device1 to  
Device6 buttons, press the button with the All Stop  
assignment.  
• The maximum recording time in one operation is 30  
minutes.  
• If recording is interrupted and restarted without  
changing the file name, recording results are saved in the  
same file from the point of interruption. If you want to  
record to a different file, create a new file (see page 150).  
Conducting jog and shuttle mode search  
Select jog or shuttle mode by pressing the Jog or Shuttle  
button, as assigned in the Utility menu. Then control the  
direction and speed of search with the joystick in the  
Effect/Wipe control block.  
Push the joystick to the right to search in the forward  
direction, and to the left to search in the reverse direction.  
To stop recording  
Press the Stop button or the All Stop button (both buttons  
as assigned in the Utility menu).  
Checking VTR, Disk Recorder, and  
Extended VTR Information  
Setting start points  
Press the Start TC button, as assigned in the Utility menu.  
The current timecode is set as the start point. The settable  
range is as follows, depending on the signal format.  
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:xx (xx: frames per second  
minus 1 frame)  
Use the Timecode Status menu to check VTR, disk  
recorder, and Extended VTR information.  
To display the Timecode Status menu, select Misc>DDR/  
VTR>TC Status from the top menu. When the menu  
appears, the status, current timecode, start timecode, and  
variable speed of each device (Device1 to Device6) appear  
in the status area.  
Start points can also be set from a menu. See “Setting start  
points” (page 148) for details about operation.  
You can change the settings of the start point timecode and  
the variable speed.  
Cuing up start points  
Press the Cue Up button, as assigned in the Utility menu.  
While the reference device is cued up, the CUE button  
flashes in amber. When the cue up ends, the button  
changes to lit in green.  
Controlling External Devices  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Checking Device Status  
Status  
display  
When the Video Disk When other devices  
Communications  
Protocol is used  
are used  
Still  
Playing still image.  
a) Displayed in red characters.  
Setting start points  
1
Do one of the following to select the device on which  
to set the start point.  
• Press directly on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
The following information is shown in the [Status]  
column.  
• Turn the knob.  
Status  
display  
When the Video Disk When other devices  
Communications  
Protocol is used  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
are used  
1 (DEV)  
Device number  
1 to 6  
XXXX  
Local  
Not communicating, or Communications with  
communicating but the the device are being  
device type cannot be carried out normally,  
2
3
Press [Start TC].  
The timecode window opens.  
read.  
but status information  
is not received.  
Input the desired start point timecode, then press  
[Enter].  
Port is not open.  
The REMOTE/LOCAL  
switch of the device is  
set to LOCAL.  
This sets the start point.  
Tape Out No file loaded.  
VTR: No tape loaded.  
Disk recorder: No file  
loaded.  
To delete a start point setting  
Select the device selected in step 1 and press [Start TC  
CLR].  
a)  
Recording  
Rec  
Cue>  
Cueing up in the  
forward direction.  
Setting variable speeds  
Cue<  
Cueing up in the  
reverse direction.  
1
Do one of the following to select the device on which  
to set the variable speed.  
Eject  
Play  
Stop  
Ejecting cassette.  
Playing.  
Stopped.  
• Press directly on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Stopped in standby on  
mode.  
• Turn the knob.  
Stb Off  
Stopped in standby off  
mode.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
FF  
Fast forwarding.  
Rewinding.  
1 (DEV)  
Device number  
1 to 6  
Rewind  
Shtl>  
Searching in the  
forward direction in  
shuttle mode.  
2
3
Turn the knob to set the variable speed.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Shtl<  
Searching in the  
reverse direction in  
shuttle mode.  
2 (Variable) Variable speed  
–100 to +200  
Press [Variable Set].  
Var>  
Var<  
Searching in the forward direction in variable  
speed mode.  
The variable speed is set.  
Searching in the reverse direction in variable  
speed mode.  
To delete a variable speed setting  
Select the device selected in step 1 and press [Variable  
CLR].  
Jog>  
Jog<  
Searching in the forward direction in jog mode.  
Searching in the reverse direction in jog mode.  
148  
Controlling External Devices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Disk Recorder/Extended VTR File  
Operations  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (DEV)  
Device number  
1 to 6  
Internally, disk recorders and Extended VTRs manage  
recorded material in units of files.  
When using disk recorders and Extended VTRs for  
playback and recording, you need to perform the following  
file operations.  
Loading file lists: Before you can play a file from a disk  
recorder or Extended VTR, you need to display a list  
of the files stored on the device.  
Loading files: With the file list visible, you need to select  
a file from the list to load.  
Note  
File lists cannot be loaded from disk recorders which  
are being used as recorders.  
3
Press [List Update].  
Loading of the file list starts, and a progress bar  
appears in a popup window. The popup window  
disappears when loading of the file list finishes  
successfully. An error message appears if an error  
occurs.  
Creating files: To record to a disk recorder, you need to  
create the file to record.  
To sort file lists  
Note  
1
2
Press [Sort].  
When using an MAV-555A/777 disk recorder to carry out  
file operations, the operation mode must be set to panel  
mode on the disk recorder side.  
A popup window appears.  
Select the sort conditions.  
Loading file lists  
File No: Sort by file number (smallest first).  
File Name: Sort alphabetically by file name.  
Date: Sort by file update date (newest first).  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >DDR/VTR >File  
List.  
Notes  
The File List menu appears. The upper part of the  
status area shows the device number of the currently  
selected device, and the currently loaded file. The  
lower part of the status area shows the names, data  
length (in timecode format), and dates of updating of  
files contained in the currently loaded file list.  
• File lists cannot be sorted by date when using the  
Video Disk Communications Protocol.  
• File lists cannot be sorted when using an Extended  
VTR. (Extended VTR files are shown in register  
order (1 to 99).)  
This sorts the file list in the selected order.  
File list sharing  
You can share loaded file lists across serial ports  
connected to the same disk recorder.  
For more information about how to share file lists, see “To  
Loading files  
Proceed as follows to load a file from a file list.  
Disk recorder used as player  
1
2
From the top menu, select Misc >DDR/VTR >File  
List.  
Notes  
• File update dates are not displayed for disk recorders  
using the Video Disk Communications Protocol.  
• File lengths and update dates are not displayed for  
Extended VTRs, and register numbers are shown in  
place of file names.  
The File List menu appears.  
Turn the knob to select the player device which has the  
file you want to load.  
2
Turn the knob to select a player device.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (DEV)  
Device number  
1 to 6  
Controlling External Devices  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Do one of the following to select the file to load.  
The keyboard window appears.  
• Press directly on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
4
Enter a file name and press [Enter].  
The maximum file name length is as follows.  
Disk recorder (Sony Disk 9-pin Protocol): 16  
characters  
Disk recorder (Video Disk Communications  
Protocol): 8 characters  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
2 (List No)  
1 and upwards  
File number  
b)  
0 and upwards  
Register number  
The new file name appears at the top of the status area.  
a)Disk recorder  
b)Extended VTR  
When the loaded file is not a target for recording  
Press [File Unload].  
The current file name at the top of the status area is  
cleared.  
Press [File Load].  
The selected file is loaded, and its name appears at the  
top of the status area.  
Creating new files (disk recorders only)  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >DDR/VTR >File  
List.  
The File List menu appears. The upper part of the  
status area shows the device number of the currently  
selected device, and the currently loaded file. The  
lower part of the status area shows the currently loaded  
file list.  
Disk recorder set to Recorder  
Note  
File update dates are not displayed for disk recorders  
using the Video Disk Communications Protocol.  
2
3
Turn the knob to select the device on which to create  
the new file.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (DEV)  
Device number  
1 to 6  
Note  
You will not be able to create a file if you select a disk  
recorder that is being used as a player.  
Press [New File].  
150  
Controlling External Devices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The MKS-8080/8082 operates in AUX bus mode, with  
settings set to the following factory defaults.  
Simple Connection to  
MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus  
Remote Panel  
C: SET SWITCHER ID (for AUX mode)  
This is set to 001, which is the station number of  
the MFS-2000 control panel.  
D: SET AUX DESTINATION/SOURCE (for AUX  
mode)  
The source is set to IN001 and following, and  
destination is set to OUT001 and following.  
H: SET PHANTOM TABLE (for Router mode)  
This is unset, since the unit does not operate in router  
mode.  
N: SET PANEL TABLE (for Router mode)  
The source is set to IN001 and following, and  
destination is set to OUT001 and following.  
However, since the unit does not operate in router  
mode, these settings are not used.  
You can connect the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote  
Panel to enable remote control of the switcher’s AUX  
buses.  
To connect the MKS-8080/8082 to the control panel  
requires an HKSP-R80 Routing Switcher Controller Board  
or similar device constituting a primary station for an S-  
Bus data link, as well as various settings for connction.  
However, using a simple connection, the need for an S-Bus  
data link primary station is avoided, and direct connection  
to the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.  
A simple connection is possible if the following conditions  
are met:  
R: SET ROUTE  
Since when using the simple connection the switcher  
and router cannot be connected in cascade, no  
route setting is required, and this is unset.  
O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION  
The source and destination ranges are set so that the  
MFS-2000 inputs and outputs can be selected.  
Y: SET DISPLAY MODES  
The DISPLAY MODES/PANEL FUNCTION setting  
is set to NORMAL. The TALLY GROUP settings  
are all set to OFF.  
• There are no devices other than the MFS-2000 and  
MKS-8080/8082 connected on the S-Bus data link.  
• There are no more than 16 MKS-8080/8082 units  
connected on the S-Bus data link.  
For settings on the MKS-8080/8082, refer to “Making the  
Settings With Buttons (Setup Function)” in the MKS-8080/  
8082 Operation Manual.  
Proceed as follows.  
Z: SET PANEL STATUS  
The various settings are the same as the factory default  
1
2
3
Carry out initialization of the MKS-8080/8082  
settings. (This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082  
separately.)  
settings.  
Refer to “Menu Operations” in the Operation Manual of  
the MKS-8080/8082 for the meaning of the above settings.  
Set the MKS-8080/8082 station number in the range 2  
to 17. (This can be done on the MKS-8080/8082  
separately.)  
Set the STATION ID switches S108 on the front panel  
of the FP-141 board to 001 (1 only is set to the OFF  
side).  
This sets the MFS-2000 control panel as the S-Bus  
data link primary station.  
4
5
Use the Setup/Diag >System >Initialize menu (see  
page 165) to reboot the system.  
When the reboot finishes, connection to the MKS-  
8080/8082 is possible.  
In the Setup/Diag >System Tally >S-Bus Assign menu  
(see page 182), set the position of the MFS-2000  
system in the S-Bus space as follows.  
• Matrix size: Standard 136 × 138  
• Source, Destination, Level: 1  
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
152  
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Chapter  
Note  
After changing the signal format, input reference signal, or  
screen aspect ratio settings, be sure to save the new  
settings.  
Basic Settings  
Format Settings (Format Menu)  
For details of saving settings, see “Saving Setup (Startup  
Use the Format menu to set the signal format used in the  
switcher system, the input reference signal (HD system  
only), and the screen aspect ratio.  
Setting the signal format  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System  
>Format.  
Note  
Using an HD system requires the optional BZS-2000M.  
The Format menu appears. The status area shows the  
current settings (switcher settings) of the signal  
format, reference video signal, and screen aspect ratio.  
Signal format  
The signal format is indicated by a combination of the  
number of valid scan lines and the field frequency. The  
signal formats with which the switcher system can be used  
are as follows.  
System  
Valid scan lines  
720p  
Field frequency  
HD system  
59.94  
50  
1080i  
59.94  
23.976  
24  
1080PsF  
25  
29.97  
59.94  
50  
2
Press [Format].  
SD system  
480i  
576i  
A popup window appears, showing the signal formats  
that can be used in the system.  
• 720P/59.94  
• 1080i/50  
• 1080i/59.94  
Input reference signal  
When using an HD system, you can select the input  
reference signal from the following types.  
Black Burst: SD system black burst  
• 1080PsF/23.976  
• 1080PsF/24  
Tri Sync: HD system tri-level sync  
• 1080PsF/25  
• 1080PsF/29.97  
• 480i/59.94  
Screen aspect ratio  
You can set the screen aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9.  
• 576i/50  
Basic Settings  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
3
4
Press directly on the indication for the signal format  
you want to set.  
The popup window closes, and a confirmation  
message appears, prompting whether or not to change  
the screen aspect ratio.  
The popup window closes, and a confirmation  
message appears, prompting whether or not to change  
the signal format.  
4
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This changes the screen aspect ratio.  
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
To cancel changing the screen aspect ratio  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
This changes the signal format setting, and resets the  
system.  
To cancel changing the signal format  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
Setting the Startup Mode (Startup  
Mode Menu)  
Use the Startup Mode menu to set the mode for when the  
devices in the switcher system are powered on.  
You can select resume mode or custom mode.  
Setting the input reference signal  
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Setting the  
signal format.”  
Resume mode  
This restores the system state at the time it was last  
powered off. You can only set this for the switcher  
processor and control panel.  
Press [Ref Format].  
A popup window appears, showing the input reference  
signals that can be used in the system.  
• Black Burst  
Custom mode  
At power on, each device is initialized to settings stored in  
its own nonvolatile memory (user settings) or ROM  
(factory default settings). You can make separate settings  
for setup and initial status.  
Setup: You can set the setup state used after powering on  
to User (user settings) or Factory (factory default  
settings).  
Initial status: You can set the initial state (other than  
setup) of each device used after powering on to User  
(user settings) or Factory (factory default settings).  
• Tri Sync  
3
4
Press directly on the indication for input reference  
signal you want to use.  
The popup window closes, and a confirmation  
message appears, prompting whether or not to change  
the input reference signal.  
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This changes the input reference signal.  
Selecting resume mode for starting up  
after powering on  
To cancel changing the input reference signal  
format  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System  
>Startup Mode.  
Setting the screen aspect ratio  
The Startup Mode menu appears. The status area  
shows the current settings.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the procedure “Setting the signal  
format” (see page 153).  
Press [Screen].  
A popup window appears, showing the screen aspect  
ratios that can be used in the system.  
• 4:3  
• 16:9  
3
Press directly on the indication for the screen aspect  
ratio you want to use.  
2
Press [Resume].  
154  
Basic Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
The popup window in the Startup Mode menu closes,  
and a confirmation message appears, prompting  
whether or not to change the mode.  
3
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This changes the mode.  
To cancel changing the mode  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
Selecting custom mode mode for starting  
up after powering on  
2
Select the output port number for which you want to  
make the setting.  
To set setup to custom mode  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
1
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Selecting  
resume mode for starting up after powering on.”  
• Turn the knob.  
2
3
If [Resume] is On, set it to Off.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Press [Setup].  
a)  
1 (No)  
Output port number selection  
1 to 8  
A popup window appears.  
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is  
installed.  
4
5
Press [User] or [Factory].  
The selected output port number appears in reverse  
video.  
The popup window closes, and a confirmation  
message appears, prompting whether or not to change  
the mode.  
3
Press [Out Assign].  
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This changes the mode.  
A popup window appears. The assignable output  
signals are shown.  
To cancel changing the mode  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
To set initial status to custom mode  
In step 2 of the above procedure, “To set setup to custom  
mode,” in place of [Setup], press [Init Status].  
The remainder of the operation is the same.  
Output Signal Assignment (Output  
Assign Menu)  
Assign output signals to each output port of the processor.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Output Assign.  
Assignable output signals  
• M/E PGM (M/E program signal)  
• M/E PVW (M/E preview signal)  
The Output Assign menu appears. The status area  
shows output port numbers and the output signals  
assigned to each port.  
• M/E Key PVW (M/E key preview signal), M/E Key  
Out (M/E key output signal), or M/E PGM Clean  
(M/E program clean signal): The display varies  
depending on the setting of [M/E Key PVW] in the  
Output Assign menu.  
Basic Settings  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• PGM (program signal): final output signal including  
the downstream key  
valid by toggling the dedicated [SHIFT] buttons above  
cross-point button rows on or off.  
• PST (preset signal)  
• PGM Clean (program clean signal): final output  
signal excluding the downstream key  
• DSK PVW (downstream key preview signal) or  
DSK Key Out (downstream key output signal): The  
display varies depending on the setting of [DSK  
PVW] in the Output Assign menu.  
Note  
The dedicated [SHIFT] button does not light and does not  
function when you are using the rightmost buttons in the  
cross-point button rows (the 12th or 20th buttons) as  
[SHIFT] buttons.  
• AUX1 (auxiliary 1 signal) to AUX4  
• EDIT PVW (edit preview signal)  
• No Assign: no signal assigned.  
For more information about how to use the rightmost  
buttons as [SHIFT] buttons, see “To use the rightmost  
4
Select the output signal to be assigned to the output  
port selected in step 2.  
Button numbers of cross-point buttons  
This makes the signal assignment.  
In the M/E cross-point control block, PGM/PSTcross-  
point control block (using a 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide  
panel), and AUX bus control block, the button numbers of  
the cross-point buttons are as shown in the following  
figure.  
For the cross-point buttons in all control blocks, the same  
signal is assigned to the same button number. The numbers  
of all of these buttons differ depending on whether the  
dedicated [SHIFT] button is on or off. The numbers also  
differ depending on whether the rightmost buttons in  
cross-point button rows are being used as [SHIFT] button  
(shift mode). See page 158 for more information about  
shift mode.  
To the right of the output port number selected in the  
status area of the Output Assign menu is shown the  
name of the assigned output signal.  
Note  
Depending on the signal, the name shown in the popup  
window and the name shown in the status area of the  
Output Assign menu may be different.  
Signal name  
shown in the  
popup window  
Signal name shown in the  
status area of the Output  
Assign menu  
M/E Key PVW  
M/E Key Out  
M/E PGM Clean  
PGM Clean  
M/E K-PVW  
M/E Key  
M/E PGM CLN  
PGM CLN  
DSK Key  
DSK Key Out  
Switching M/E PVW or PST output to DSK  
PVW output  
By pressing the DSK PVW button in the downstream key/  
fade to black control block, you can temporarily switch M/  
E PVW output (1 M/E panel) or PST output (1.5 M/E  
panel) to DSK PVW output.  
Notes  
• This function is not available when [DSK PVW Btn] is  
set to Disable. Press [DSK PVW Btn] to set it to Enable.  
• This function is not available when DSK Key Out is  
selected instead of DSK PVW.  
Assigning Signals to Cross-Point  
Buttons (Operation Menu)  
Each cross-point button in the M/E cross-point control  
block, PGM/PSTcross-point control block (using a 1.5 M/  
E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel), and AUX bus control  
block has two numbers. Select which of these numbers is  
156  
Basic Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Cross-point button numbers in the M/E cross-point control block  
XPT HOLD button  
Dedicated SHIFT button  
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
M/E  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
A
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
B
[SHIFT] Off a) : 1  
[SHIFT] On b) :13  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
22  
11  
23  
12  
(SHIFT)  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
24  
(12)c) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (SHIFT  
)
a) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel: 1 to 20  
b) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel: 21 to 40  
c) The numbers in parentheses are the button numbers when shift mode is on (set to something other than Off).  
Cross-point button numbers in the PGM/PST cross-point control block  
(For a 1.5 M/E panel or 1.5 M/E wide panel. See figure below for 1.5 M/E panel.)  
XPT HOLD button  
Dedicated SHIFT button  
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
PGM/PST  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
M/E  
PGM  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
M/E  
c)  
PST  
[SHIFT] Off a) : 1  
[SHIFT] On b) :13  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
22  
11  
23  
12  
(SHIFT)  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
24  
(12)d) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (SHIFT  
)
a) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 1 to 20  
b) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 21 to 40  
c) The signal assignment to these buttons cannot be changed.  
d) The numbers in parentheses are the button numbers when shift mode is on (set to something other than Off).  
Basic Settings  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cross-point button numbers in the AUX bus control block  
XPT/KY HOLD button  
Dedicated SHIFT button  
AUX DELEGATION  
EDIT  
PVW  
SRC  
BUS  
XP/KY  
HOLD  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX3  
DSK1  
AUX4  
DSK2  
UTIL  
KEY  
SHIFT  
PGM  
FRAME  
MEM  
KEY1  
KEY2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
M/E  
AUX  
COLOR  
BKGD  
BLACK  
[SHIFT] Off a) : 1  
[SHIFT] On b) :13  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
22  
11  
23  
12  
(SHIFT)  
c)  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
24  
(12)d) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (SHIFT  
)
a) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 1 to 20  
b) For a 1.5 M/E wide panel, button numbers: 21 to 40  
c) The signal assignment to these buttons cannot be changed.  
d) The numbers in parentheses are the button numbers when shift mode is on (set to something other than Off).  
To use the rightmost buttons in cross-point  
button rows as [SHIFT] buttons (shift mode  
selection)  
By a XPT Assign menu setting, you can use the rightmost  
buttons on cross-point button rows (the 12th buttons on  
1M/E or 1.5M/E panels, or the 20th buttons on 1.5M/E  
wide panels) as [SHIFT] buttons, which switch between  
cross-point button numbers.  
In the XPT Assign menu, press [Shift Mode] to display a  
popup window, and select a setting other than Off.  
Hold: Shift-side cross-point buttons are enabled as long as  
the rightmost button is held down.  
cross-point buttons is done by assigning pair numbers to  
cross-point button numbers.  
For the operation of combining a video signal and key  
signal, see “Creating a pair from a video signal and key  
Assigning signals to cross-point buttons  
To carry out the assignment of a video signal and key  
signal pair to a cross-point button, use the Xpt Assign  
menu.  
Lock: Shift-side cross-point buttons are enabled as long as  
the rightmost button is on.  
Off: Do not use the rightmost buttons as [SHIFT] buttons.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation  
>Xpt Assign.  
The Xpt Assign menu appears.  
Note  
The dedicated [SHIFT] button above the cross-point  
button rows is disabled when you select a setting other than  
Off.  
Signals assigned to cross-point buttons  
You can assign two signals, the video signal and key  
signal, as a pair to each cross-point button number. With  
this unit you can register a maximum of 40 pairs of video  
and key signals. For each pair the assigned number is  
referred to as a pair number. The signal assignment to  
158  
Basic Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
The “XPT Button” (cross-point button) list appears at  
the left of the status area. This list includes the  
following items.  
Creating a pair from a video signal and key  
signal  
To create a pair from a video signal and key signal to be  
assigned to a cross-point button, use the Video/Key Pair  
Assign menu.  
No: cross-point button number  
P-No: video signal and key signal pair number  
Video: video signal name (source name)  
Key: key signal name (source name)  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation >V/  
K Pain Assign.  
The “Video/Key Pair” list appears at the right of the  
status area. This list includes the following items.  
P-No: video signal and key signal pair number  
Video: video signal name (source name) being one of  
the pair  
The Video/Key Pair Assign menu appears.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the cross-  
point button number to which you want to assign the  
signal.  
• Press a cross-point button in the AUX bus control  
block.  
• Press directry on the “XPT Button” list in the status  
area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
The “Video/Key Pair” list appears at the left of the  
status area. This list includes the following items.  
P-No: video signal and key signal pair number  
Video: video signal name (source name)  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Key: key signal name (source name)  
a)  
1 (Button No) Cross-point button number  
selection  
1 to 24  
1 to 40  
b)  
The “Source” list appears at the right of the status area.  
This list includes the following items.  
No: source signal number  
a) For 1 M/E panel and 1.5M/E panel  
b) For 1.5 M/E wide panel  
Source: source signal name  
The selected number appears in reverse video.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the pair  
number you want to create (or combination you want  
to change).  
3
4
Using any of the following methods, select the pair  
number for the video signal and key signal you want to  
assign to the selected cross-point button number.  
• Press directry on the “Video/Key Pair” list in the  
status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Press directry on the “Video/Key Pair” list in the  
status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knobs.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
1 (Pair No)  
Pair number selection  
P1 to P40  
4 (Pair No)  
Pair number selection  
P1 to P40  
The selected pair number appears in reverse video.  
Press [Set] in the button area.  
3
4
To set the video signal for the selected pair, press  
[Video Assign] in the button area, setting it to  
“Enable.”  
To disable any cross-point button  
You can disable a cross-point button to which a signal is  
assigned so that pressing it does not select the signal.  
In step 2, select the desired button number, and press  
[Inhibit], turning it on.  
Using any of the following methods, select the source  
number to be assigned as the video signal.  
• Press directry on the “Source” list in the status area.  
Basic Settings  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Saving the initial status  
• Turn the knobs to make the setting.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the procedure “Saving the setup  
state” (previous section).  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Press [Init Define].  
4 (Source No) Source number selection  
1 to 33  
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether  
or not to save the current state of the devices as the  
initial status.  
The selected source number appears in reverse video.  
Press [Set] in the button area.  
5
3
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This saves the state.  
In the “Video” column of the “Video/Key Pair” list,  
the selected source name changes to the source name  
selected in step 4.  
To cancel saving  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
6
7
8
To set the key signal for the selected pair, press [Key  
Assign] in the button area, setting it to “Enable.”  
With the same operation as in step 4, select the source  
number to be assigned as the key signal.  
Press [Set] in the button area.  
In the “Key” column of the “Video/Key Pair” list, the  
selected source name changes to the source name  
selected in step 5.  
Saving Setup (Startup Mode Menu)  
Using the Startup Mode menu, you save the setup state of  
the devices constituting the switcher system and the initial  
status after powering on in the nonvolatile memory of each  
device.  
Saving the setup state  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System  
>Startup Mode.  
The Startup Mode menu appears. The status area  
shows the current settings (see page 154)  
2
3
Press [Setup Define].  
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether  
or not to save the current setup state.  
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This saves the state.  
To cancel saving  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
160  
Basic Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Displaying Detail Information (Detail  
Information Menu)  
Installing Software  
To check the detail information for an application shown  
in the Version Information menu, use the Detail  
Information menu.  
To display the Detail Information menu, from the top  
menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install >Detail Info.  
This section describes how to install the software  
constituting the MFS-2000 system.  
To install software, use the Info/Install menu. In the Info/  
Install menu, you can check the software version, or enter  
an installation key for each device.  
Displaying Version Information  
(Version Information Menu)  
To check the version of the application software (referred  
to as “applications”) currently installed in the devices  
constituting the MFS-2000 system, use the Version  
Information menu.  
To display the Version Information menu, from the top  
menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install >Version Info.  
The abbreviation for the currently selected application  
appears on the [Target] button. The status area shows the  
name and version of the software/firmware constituting  
the currently selected application.  
Note  
No detail information is shown for applications not  
communicating with the menu application and  
applications for which version information was not  
available.  
The status area shows abbreviations for the applications  
and the version numbers.  
If there are no communications with an application in the  
menu, the application box is grayed out. If the version  
information is not available, the [Version] box is left  
blank.  
To change the application for which detail  
information is displayed  
Press the [Target] button.  
When the popup window appears, press the button for the  
application for which you want to view the detail  
information.  
The button names are the same as the application  
Abbreviations for applications  
Abbreviation  
SWR  
Name  
Switcher  
DME  
Manually Installing Software (Manual  
Install Menu)  
DME  
PNL  
Control panel  
Menu  
To install only the required software/firmware manually,  
use the Manual Install menu. Insert a “Memory Stick” on  
which the software has already been written.  
MENU  
DCU  
DCU  
Note  
Version information display  
The version information is shown as follows.  
V + version number + (Date)  
E.g. V1.00 (Jul.01.2004)  
Install the DCU software separately from other software.  
For details of software installation, refer to “Installing  
Software” in the Appendix (separate document).  
Version number: V1.00  
Last updated: July 1, 2004  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install  
>Manual Install.  
Installing Software  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
The Manual Install menu appears.  
Press [Refresh].  
Note  
Never power off during the installation. If you power  
off during the installation, the particular device may  
not be able to be restarted.  
2
This loads the data from the “Memory Stick,” and the  
status area shows the abbreviation for each  
application, and the version, name, and install settings  
([On]/[Off]) for the software/firmware constituting the  
application. If there are no communications with an  
application in the menu, the application box is grayed  
out.  
To cancel the installation  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
If you have pressed [Yes] to begin the installation,  
press [Cancel] in the progress bar.  
If an error occurs  
A message appears, indicating what the error is.  
Check the message, and press [OK] to close the  
message dialog box.  
When the installation finishes, the indication in the  
[Install] column changes as follows.  
If the installation completes normally: [OK]  
appears.  
If an error occurred: [Error] appears.  
Entering an Installation Key (License  
Menu)  
If there is no data for an application to be installed  
in the “Memory Stick”  
A dialog box appears.  
Press [OK] to close the dialog box.  
To use software options (referred to as “options”),  
installation keys are required. An installation key is a  
password (16 alphanumeric characters) issued for each  
option of each application. In the MFS-2000 system,  
installation keys are issued for the following options.  
3
4
Select the software/firmware.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Application  
Model number  
Product name  
SWR (switcher)  
BZS-2000M  
Switcher Upgrade  
Software (Multi)  
• Turn the knob.  
BZS-2440M  
Frame Memory  
Upgrade Software  
(Multi)  
Knob  
Setting  
Values  
a)  
1 (No)  
Software/firmware  
selection  
1 and upwards  
DME  
BZS-2470M  
BZS-8050  
DME Upgrade  
Software (Multi)  
a) The maximum value depends on application.  
PNL (control  
panel)  
Editing Control  
Software  
Press [Install], turning it on, to install the software/  
firmware selected in step 3, or turnint it off, not to  
install.  
To activate an option you want to use, you need to enter the  
installation key in the License menu.  
To purchase an installation key requires the device ID  
(string of up to 17 alphanumeric characters). You can  
check the device ID in the License menu.  
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4.  
Press [Execute].  
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether  
or not to carry out the installation.  
For details of purchasing an installation key, contact your  
Sony sales representative.  
7
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
Checking the unique device ID  
This installs the software/firmware for which [On] is  
set.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Info/Install  
>Licence.  
The License menu appears.  
162  
Installing Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
If the installation key is incorrect: a message  
appears, indicating that the installation key is  
incorrect. Press [OK] in the dialog box, go back to  
step 3, and re-enter the installation key.  
5
Using either of the following methods, restart the  
system.  
• In the Setup/Diag >System >Initialize menu, press  
[Reset].  
• Exit the menu system, power the control panel off  
and then power it on again.  
The abbreviation for the currently selected application  
appears on the [Target] button. The status area shows the  
device ID (Unique Device ID) for the currently selected  
application, and the model number, product name, and  
current state ([Active] or blank) of each of the options  
available. Unsupported option columns are grayed out.  
Note  
Be sure to exit the menu system before powering the  
control panel off. (On how to exit the menu system, see  
After the restart, when you display the License menu,  
for the activated option, the [Condition] column shows  
[Active].  
To change the application for which device ID  
and option information is displayed  
Press [Target].  
When the popup window appears, press the button for the  
application for which you want to view the information.  
The button names are the same as the application  
161)).  
To deactivate an option  
1
Referring to steps 1 and 2 of “Entering an installation  
key to activate an option,” select the option you want  
to deactivate.  
2
Press [Deactivate].  
Entering an installation key to activate an  
option  
A confirmation message appears, prompting whether  
to deactivate the option.  
1
Referring to the previous item “Checking the device  
ID,” display the License menu for the application for  
which you want to activate an option.  
3
4
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
A message appears, indicating that after a restart the  
option will be deactivated.  
2
Select the option you want to use.  
To cancel deactivating the option  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Press [OK] in the dialog box, restart the system.  
• Turn the knob.  
After the restart, when you display the License menu,  
for the deactivated option, the [Condition] column is  
blank.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (No)  
Selection of option  
you want to use  
1 and upwards  
a) The maximum value depends on application.  
3
4
Press [Activate].  
A keyboard window appears.  
Enter the installation key.  
If the installation key is correct: a message appears,  
indicating that the option will be activated by  
carrying out a restart. Press [OK] in the dialog box,  
and proceed to step 5.  
Installing Software  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Panel Maintenance (Panel Menu)  
Other Settings  
Use the Panel menu to make the following settings related  
to the control panel.  
• Brightness of LCD backlights  
• Screen saver  
• Beep on and off  
• Touch panel calibration  
• Hard disk formatting (only after a failure)  
Setting the Date and Time (Date/  
Time Menu)  
Use the Date/Time menu to set the date and time used by  
the system.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Maintenance  
>Panel.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Maintenance  
>Date/Time.  
The Panel menu appears. The status area shows the  
current settings of each item (except for calibration  
and HDD format).  
The Date/Time menu appears. The status area shows  
the current date and time in the [Current] line, and the  
date and time to set in the [Set] line. Immediately after  
the menu appears, both lines contain the same date and  
time.  
2
Press the button corresponding to the item you want to  
set, and set as described in the following sections.  
LCD Bright: Brightness of the LCD buttons in the  
Flexi Pad control block  
Scrn Saver: Screen saver on and off  
Touch Beep: On and off of beep sounds for touch  
panel menu operations  
Calibration: Calibration of touch panel  
HDD Format: Initialization of hard disk (only after  
failure)  
2
3
Press [Date].  
Turn the knobs to change the date in the [Set] line.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 to 12  
1 (Month) Month  
2 (Day)  
3 (Year)  
Day  
1 to 31  
Year  
2004 to 2037  
To adjust the brightness of LCDs  
Set by turning knob 1.  
4
5
Press [Time].  
Turn the knobs to change the time in the [Set] line.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Bright) Brightness.  
1 to 5  
Knob  
Description  
Hour  
Setting values  
0 to 23  
To make screen saver settings  
Press [Scrn Saver], turning it on or off, to turn the screen  
saver on and off.  
1 (Hour)  
2 (Min)  
3 (Sec)  
Minute  
0 to 59  
Second  
0 to 59  
When the screen saver is on, turn knob 1 to set the time  
until it activates.  
6
Press [Set].  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
The date and time in the [Set] line appear in the  
[Current] line.  
1 (Wait)  
Time (minutes) until screen  
saver activates.  
1 to 300  
164  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
The System Adjust menu appears. The status area  
shows the current settings.  
To turn beep sounds on and off  
Press [Touch Beep], turning it on or off.  
To calibrate the touch panel  
If touches on the touch panel do not select the desired  
menu items, you can use the following procedure to  
calibrate the touch panel.  
1
Press [Calibration].  
The following message appears.  
“To perform calibration, please touch the center of  
each plus sign.”  
2
3
Press [Sys Phase].  
2
3
Press [Yes].  
Turn the knobs to adjust the phase.  
Press the center of the [+] mark on the screen.  
The [+] mark that you pressed disappears, and another  
[+] mark appears on the diagonally opposite side.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (System Phase) System phase –32.00 to +96.00  
setting  
4
Press the center of the [+] mark.  
Setting the operation switching timing  
A confirmation message appears.  
Press [Yes] in the message dialog to confirm the  
calibration. Press [No] to cancel the calibration and  
return to the Maintenance menu.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Adjusting the  
system phase.”  
To format the hard disk  
Use [HDD Format] to format the hard disk. Do this only  
when one of the following errors has occurred.  
Press [Sw Timing].  
A popup window appears.  
Error display  
Error description  
3
Select one of the following.  
Internal Error: Data HDD Data on the internal hard disk is  
corrupt.  
Any: Switch on the earliest field that can be processed.  
Field 1: Switch on field 1.  
Field 2: Switch on field 2.  
Internal Error: HDD  
Format  
The internal hard disk is not  
formatted, or hard disk partitions  
cannot be recognized.  
Setting the illegal color limiter  
When you press [HDD Format], a confirmation message  
appears asking if you really want to format the hard disk.  
Press [Yes] in the message dialog to execute the format.  
Press [No] to cancel the format.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the procedure “Adjusting the  
system phase”.  
Press [Color Limiter], to switch the illegal color  
limiter on or off.  
System Adjustments (System Adjust  
Menu)  
System Reset and Memory  
Initialization (Initialize Menu)  
Use the System Adjust menu to carry out system phase  
adjustments, operation switching timing settings, and  
illegal color adjustments.  
Use the Initialize menu to carry out a system reset or  
memory initialization.  
When you carry out a system reset, the system is restarted  
in the state set for power on (see page 154). Carrying out a  
memory initialization returns to the factory default  
settings.  
Adjusting the system phase  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System  
>System Adjust.  
Other Settings  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
mode in which the sync signal included in an output  
signal is not replaced by an internally generated sync  
signal, but is left unchanged.  
Resetting the whole system  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System  
>Initialize.  
Video process: Adjusts the input signal luminance and  
hue.  
The Initialize menu appears.  
Carrying out phase adjustments and  
through mode setting  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Input Adjust.  
The Input Adjust menu appears. The status area shows  
the input number, signal phase, and through mode  
setting.  
2
3
Press [Reset].  
The popup window closes, and a confirmation  
message appears, prompting whether or not to reset.  
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
This resets the system.  
To cancel the reset  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
2
Select the input number for which you want to make  
the setting.  
Initializing memory  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 in the previous item, “Resetting the  
whole system.”  
• Turn the knob.  
Press [All Clear].  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
The popup window closes, and a confirmation  
message appears, prompting whether or not to carry  
out the memory initialization.  
a)  
1 (Input)  
Input number selection  
1 to 16  
a) Values 9 to 16 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is  
installed.  
3
Press [Yes] in the dialog box.  
The selected input number appears in reverse video.  
This initializes memory, and resets the system.  
3
4
To adjust the phase, press [Input Phase], and turn the  
knobs to adjust the parameters.  
To cancel memory initialization  
Press [No] in the dialog box.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Input Phase)  
Phase  
–16 to +16  
Input Signal Setup (Input/Output  
Menu)  
To carry out the through mode setting, press [Thru  
Mode], toggling it between Enable and Disable.  
Use the Input/Output menu to carry out setup relating to  
processor primary input signals.  
You can make the following settings.  
Phase: Adjust the phase of the primary input signals.  
Through mode: For each primary input, select whether  
the through mode is on or off. The through mode is a  
Enable: Enable the through mode.  
Disable: Disable the through mode.  
166  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Note  
Parameter group 2/2  
Description Setting values  
To make through mode effective, it is also necessary to  
set output side through mode to “Enable” (see page  
Knob  
2 (Video Gain) Overall gain of –200.00 to +200.00  
the video signal  
3 (C Gain)  
Chrominance  
signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
Making the video process setting  
4 (Hue Delay)  
Hue delay  
–180.00 to +180.00  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Video Process.  
Output Signal Setup (Input/Output  
Menu)  
The Video Process menu appears. The status area  
shows the input numbers, and video processing  
adjustment values.  
Use the Input/Output menu to carry out setup relating to  
output signals.  
You can make the following settings.  
Output signal assignment: Assign an output signal to  
Video clip: For each output port, adjust the output signal  
clip levels (White Clip, Dark Clip, Chroma Clip).  
Vertical blanking width: For each output port, adjust the  
vertical blanking width of the output signal. The  
adjustment value indicates the position of the line up  
to which masking takes place, relative to the blanking  
width of field 1 of the video format.  
Through mode: For each output port, set whether the  
through mode is on or off. The through mode is a mode  
in which the sync signal included in an output signal is  
not replaced by an internally generated sync signal, but  
is left unchanged.  
Crop: When the screen aspect ratio in an HD system is  
4:3, set how the output image is reduced to 4:3.  
Safe title: Select safe title markers for each output port.  
Reference output: Adjust the reference output phase with  
respect to the reference input phase, as a number of  
lines and a time.  
2
Select the input number for which you want to make  
the setting.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
The parameter assignment to knob 1 is the same in  
parameter groups 1/2 and 2/2.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
a)  
1 (Input)  
Input number selection  
1 to 16  
Video clip adjustment  
a) Values 9 to 16 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is  
installed.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Output Clip.  
The selected input number appears in reverse video.  
Press [Video Proc], turning it on.  
The Output Clip menu appears. The status area shows  
the output port numbers, and the output signal  
assigned to each port, and the white clip, dark clip, and  
chrominance clip values.  
3
4
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.  
Parameter group 1/2  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Video Gain) Overall gain of –200.00 to +200.00  
the video signal  
3 (Y Gain)  
Y signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–7.31 to +109.59  
4 (Black Level) Black level  
Other Settings  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2
Select the output port number for which you want to  
make the setting.  
2
Select the output port number for which you want to  
make the setting.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
a)  
a)  
1 (No)  
Output port number selection  
1 (No)  
Output port number selection  
1 to 8  
1 to 8  
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is  
installed.  
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is  
installed.  
The selected output port number appears in reverse  
video.  
The selected output port number appears in reverse  
video.  
3
4
Press [Output Clip].  
3
4
Press [V Blank].  
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.  
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
a)  
2 (White)  
3 (Dark)  
Luminance signal white clip  
value  
90.00 to  
109.02  
2 (Mask End) Last line of vertical  
blanking interval  
10 to 19  
b)  
6 to 22  
7 to 20  
7 to 25  
c)  
d)  
Luminance signal dark clip  
value  
–6.85 to  
+10.00  
4 (Chroma) Chrominance signal clip  
value  
90.00 to  
113.17  
a) When signal format is 480i/59.94  
b) When signal format is 576i/50  
c) For any signal format with valid scan lines of 1080i or 1080PsF  
d) When signal format is 720p/59.94  
To reset the settings to the default values  
Press [Default]. All parameters, White, Dark, and  
Chroma for the output signal currently being set are  
returned to their default values.  
To reset the settings to the default values  
Press [Default].  
5
To carry out the through mode setting, press [Thru  
Mode], toggling it between Enable and Disable.  
Making vertical blanking width and  
through mode settings  
Enable: Enable the through mode.  
Disable: Disable the through mode.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>V Blank/Through.  
Notes  
The V Blank/Through menu appears. The status area  
shows the output port numbers, and for each port the  
assigned output signal, vertical blanking width, and  
through mode setting.  
• The through mode setting can only be made for the  
following output signals.  
168  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
M/E PGM, PGM, PGM Clean, AUX1 to AUX4, and  
Edit PVW  
Setting the reference output  
• To make through mode effective, it is also necessary  
to set input side through mode to “Enable” (see page  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Ref Out.  
The Reference Out menu appears. The status area  
shows the reference output phase parameters (Line,  
Time).  
In an HD system, to crop the image in 4:3  
mode  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Output Crop.  
The Output Crop menu appears. The status area shows  
the output port numbers, and for each port the assigned  
output signal, and 4:3 crop mode setting.  
2
3
Press [Phase].  
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Number of lines  
Time  
Setting values  
–90 to +90  
1 (Line)  
2 (Time)  
–32.00 to +96.00  
2
Select the output port number for which you want to  
make the setting.  
Making safe title settings  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
This procedure allows you to set up safe title output. To  
actually execute safe title output, you need to turn on safe  
title output in the Enable/Safe Title menu.  
• Turn the knob.  
For details about operation, see “Safe Title” (page 134).  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Input/Output  
>Safe Title.  
a)  
1 (No)  
Output port number selection  
1 to 8  
a) Values 5 to 8 are only valid when the MKS-2110M (option) is  
installed.  
The Safe Title menu appears. The status area shows  
the output port numbers, the output signal assigned to  
each port, and the markers set for each port.  
The selected output port number appears in reverse  
video.  
3
Press [4:3 Crop].  
This toggles the 4:3 crop mode on and off, and the [4:3  
Crop] column in the status area shows the setting as  
follows.  
Indication when enabled: On  
Indication when disabled: blank  
Note  
When the HD system screen aspect ratio is set to 16:9  
(see page 154) in the Setup/Diag >Format menu or  
when your system is set to an SD format (see page  
153), it is not possible to enable the 4:3 crop mode.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the output  
port number for which you want to make the setting.  
Other Settings  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
The Utility menu appears. The “Assign” list of  
currently assigned utility commands appears at the left  
of the status area. The “Utility Command” list of all  
assignable utility commands appears at the right of the  
status area.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (No) Output port number selection  
The status area displays abbreviated utility command  
names. See the next section “Utility command list” for  
a list of these abbreviated names.  
1 to 8  
a) Setting values 5 to 8 are valid only when the MKS-2110M (option)  
is installed.  
The selected output port number appears in reverse  
video.  
3
Press the button for the marker that you want to set  
(multiple selections possible).  
Box1: Box marker 1  
Box2: Box marker 2 (adjustable luminance)  
Cross: Cross marker  
If you select Box1 or Box2, a popup window opens so  
that you can select the aspect ratio. You can also set the  
aspect ratio by turning the knobs. If you select Cross,  
the cross marker is turned on.  
2
3
Press [Block Sel].  
A popup window appears.  
To select the aspect ratio  
In the popup window, press the button for the aspect ratio  
that you want.  
• 16:9  
Select the group of operation buttons to which you  
want to assign a utility command.  
• 14:9  
• 4:3  
Device/Utility: DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons  
Enable/Utility: ENABLE/UTILITY operation  
buttons  
To set other marker parameters  
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.  
4
In the “Assign” list, select the button to which you  
want to assign the command.  
• When Box1 was selected:  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Size)  
Size of box  
50.00 to 100.00  
• Turn the knob.  
• When Box2 was selected:  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (No) Button number selection  
1 to 9  
2 (Size)  
Size of box  
50.00 to 100.00  
b)  
1 to 4  
3 (Luminance) Luminance of displayed 0.00 to 100.00  
color  
a) When Device/Utility is selected  
b) Enable/Utility is selected  
Utility Settings (Utility Menu)  
5
In the “Utility Command” list, do any of the following  
to select the command to assign to the selected button.  
You can assign utility commands to the buttons in the  
utility control block.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Assigning utility commands  
• Turn the knobs.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation  
>Utility.  
170  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
3 (Command) Utility command  
selection  
1 and upwards  
4 (GPI No) a) GPI number  
selection  
1 to 16  
a) Knob 3 appears only when SWR GPI ? Test Fire is selected.  
6
Press [Set].  
To clear a utility command assignment  
Select a button by performing step 4, and press [Clear].  
Other Settings  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utility command list  
The status area displays the following abbreviated names  
of utility commands.  
Command name  
Function of command button  
Button state  
a)  
Not lit  
Lit  
Editor Enbl  
Enable and disable the switcher editor port.  
Enable and disable all switcher GPI input ports.  
Enable and disable all control panel GPI input ports.  
Enable  
Disable  
SWR GPI Enbl  
Panel GPI Enbl  
Safe Title  
Switch between output (On) and no output (off) of safe title  
markers.  
On  
Off  
FM V Frame Freeze Switch between frame-unit capture of video to frame memory  
(On) and no capture (Off).  
FM V Field Freeze Switch between field-unit capture of video to frame memory  
(On) and no capture (Off).  
FM V Freeze Off  
Switch between disable freeze capture of video to frame  
memory (On) and enable freeze capture (Off).  
FM K Frame Freeze Switch between frame-unit capture of key to frame memory  
(On) and no capture (Off).  
FM K Field Freeze Switch between field-unit capture of key to frame memory  
(On) and no capture (Off).  
FM K Freeze Off  
Switch between disable freeze capture of key to frame  
memory (On) and enable freeze capture (Off).  
SWR GPI ? Test  
Fire  
Execute test trigger output on the selected GPI output port. Flashes during test  
fire execution  
b)  
Mcro Only Set  
Set macro attachment mode to Macro Only.  
On  
Off  
Mcro AT with Rate  
Save transition rate when registering a macro event, and  
apply it as the transition rate when executing the event (only  
when registering auto transition, key auto transition, or fade  
to black).  
Mcro AT with A/B  
Save A/B Bus cross-point settings when registering a macro  
event, and apply them as A/B Bus cross-point settings when  
executing the event (only when registering auto transitions).  
Device 1 to Device Select devices to control. When several devices are  
Selection (lights in  
green for reference  
device)  
De-selection  
6
selected, the button pressed first selects the reference  
device.  
Play  
Execute play by the selected device, or when pressed  
together with the Rec button, execute recording by the  
selected device.  
Executing play or  
recording  
Play or recording  
over or stopped  
Stop  
Stop play, recording, or cue up by the selected device  
Play, recording, or  
cue up is over or  
stopped  
Executing play,  
recording, or cue  
up, or executing jog  
or shuttle search  
All Stop  
Stop play, recording, or cue up by all devices.  
Executing: Flashes  
once  
Cued up: Flashes in  
amber  
Cue up over: Lights  
in green  
Cue Up  
Cue up the selected device. When several devices are  
selected, the button lights in green when the reference  
device finishes cue up.  
Executing: Flashes Stopped  
Execution over:  
Lights in green  
Start TC  
Set the timecode of the point where the button is pressed as Flashes during  
the start timecode of the selected device. execution (beep also  
output)  
172  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command name  
Function of command button  
Button state  
a)  
Not lit  
Lit  
Rec  
When pressed together with the Play button, execute  
recording on the selected device.  
Lights in red during  
execution.  
Recording over or  
stopped  
Shuttle  
Turn shuttle mode on or off.  
Turn jog mode on or off.  
On  
Off  
Jog  
PVW Select M/E  
Switch Edit PVW output to M/E PVW output. (Goes off  
automatically when other operation disables this command.)  
PVW Select PST  
Auto PVW  
Switch Edit PVW output to PST output. (Goes off  
automatically when other operation disables this command.)  
Turn auto preview on and off. When auto preview is on, Edit On (lit in green)  
PVW output switches as follows.  
Off  
Button with PVW Select M/E assignment is on: If M/E  
PGM is on-air, switch Edit PVW output to M/E PVW  
output. If M/E PGM is not on-air, switch Edit PVW output  
to M/E PGM output.  
Button with PVW Select PST assignment is on: If M/E  
PGM is selected on both PGM bus and PST bus, switch  
Edit PVW output to M/E PVW output. If signal other than  
M/E PGM is selected on either PGM bus or PST bus,  
switch Edit PVW output to PST output.  
a) Unless otherwise specified, lit in amber  
b) [?] is the GPI number selected in step 5 of “Assigning utility commands” (see page 170).  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
Key Setup (Key Menu)  
Use the Key menu to make settings related to keys, such as  
key memory and the show key function.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
Selecting the key memory operating mode  
1 (Key)  
Key selection  
1, 2  
a) 1: Key1, 2  
2: DSK1, 2 (1.5 M/E panel only)  
information about key memory.  
3
4
Press [Key Memory].  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation  
>Key.  
A popup window appears.  
The Key menu appears. The current key and key  
memory operating mode, key bus cross-point hold  
mode, and mask/border processing order settings  
appear in the status area.  
Select the key memory operating mode.  
• Simple  
• Full  
• Off  
Setting the key bus cross-point hold mode  
You can set the operating mode of the key bus [XP/KY  
HOLD] button in the AUX bus control block.  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of “Selecting the key memory  
operating mode”.  
Press [XP/KY Hold].  
A popup window appears.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the target  
key.  
3
Select the cross-point hold mode.  
Other Settings  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Key Disable: The key bus [XP/KY HOLD] button  
functions as a key disable button. When a snapshot  
is loaded with the [XP/KY HOLD] button on, key  
setting data in the snapshot (including cross-point  
selection data) is ignored.  
Key Disable with Status: This is the same function as  
[Key Disable], but additionally key on/off status  
data is ignored.  
Xpt Hold: The key bus [XP/KY HOLD] button  
functions as a cross-point hold button. When a  
snapshot is loaded with the [XP/KY HOLD]  
button on, cross-point selection data is ignored.  
Settings Relating to Video Switching  
(Transition Menu)  
For settings relating to video switching, use the Transition  
menu.  
The Transition menu has the following items.  
Bus Toggle: For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks,  
switch the bus toggle on or off.  
PST Color Mix: For each of the M/E and PGM/PST  
banks, set the stroke mode for a preset color mix and  
the mode in which the transition type after a transition  
ends returns to the previous setting.  
FTB: Enable or disable fade-to-black for each final  
program output.  
Fader Curve: Set the relationship when carrying out a  
transition, between the fader lever position and the  
advancement state of the transition.  
Setting mask and border processing order  
You can invert the order in which mask and border effects  
are processed when you apply a mask.  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of “Selecting the key memory  
operating mode” (see page 173).  
Setting the Bus Toggle On or Off  
Press [Msk/Bdr Proc].  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation  
>Transition.  
A popup window appears.  
The Transition menu appears.  
3
Select one of the following.  
The status area and button area show the bus toggle,  
preset color mix, fade-to-black, and fader curve  
settings.  
Mask t Border: Mask effect is applied first, then  
Border effect.  
Border t Mask: Border effect is applied first, then  
Mask effect.  
Making show key settings  
Enable and disable the show key function, and set the show  
key output hold interval.  
information about show key.  
1
2
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation  
>Key.  
2
3
When the control panel is a 1.5 M/E panel, select the  
bank to which the settings apply.  
The Key menu appears (see page 173).  
• Press directly on the list appearing in the status area.  
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Note  
Show key cannot be set individually for Key1 and 2,  
and DSK1 and 2.  
• Turn the knob.  
Press [Show Key] to enable show key output, and turn  
knob 2 to set the show key output hold time.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Bank) M/E or P/P selection to  
which settings apply  
1, 2  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
The selected bank appears in reverse video.  
2 (Hold Time) Show key output hold 0 to 999  
time (frames)  
Press [Bus Toggle] to switch between on and off.  
On: Flip-flop mode  
Off: Bus fixed mode  
174  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Enable: Each time a transition ends, the transition  
type returns to the immediately previous setting.  
(When a transition ends, the [PST COLOR MIX]  
button goes off.)  
Disable: Even when a transition ends, the preset color  
mix remains selected. (The [PST COLOR MIX]  
button remains lit when the transition ends.)  
Note  
When using the BZS-8050, select flip-flop mode (set  
Bus Toggle to On).  
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode  
The following describes the difference between flip-flop  
mode and bus fixed mode, taking an M/E bank as an  
example; the functionality is the same, however, on the  
PGM/PST bank.  
Normally, when a background transition is carried out on  
the M/E bank, the signals selected on the A and B rows of  
cross-point buttons are interchanged at the end of the  
transition. That is to say, except during a transition, the  
background output is always from the background A bus.  
This is called “flip-flop mode.”  
Enabling or Disabling the Fade-to-Black  
Function  
You can set this so that no fade-to-black occurs, even when  
you press the [FTB] button in the downstream key/fade to  
black control block.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 of the procedure for “Setting the Bus  
The alternative is known as “bus fixed mode,” in which  
there is no bus interchange. In this mode, when the fader  
lever is at the top of its travel the output from the A bus is  
always 100%, and when the fader lever is at the bottom of  
its travel the output from the B bus is 100%.  
Press [FTB] to toggle between Enable and Disable.  
Enable: When the [FTB] button is pressed, a fade-to-  
black is carried out.  
Disable: Even when the [FTB] button is pressed, no  
fade-to-black is carried out.  
Setting a Preset Color Mix  
In a normal preset color mix, in the first transition, a single  
color matte is gradually mixed into the current image, and  
in the second transition the new image is gradually mixed  
into the color matte. In the preset color mix settings, if you  
select “one-stroke mode,” these two operations are  
combined into a single transition operation.  
With the “one-time mode” enabled, when a preset color  
mix is completed, the transition type always returns to the  
immediately previous setting. To set a preset color mix,  
use the following procedure.  
Settings Relating to Fader Lever  
Operations  
To select the way in which the fader lever position and the  
transition progress are related, use the following  
procedure.  
1
2
Carry out step 1 of the procedure for “Setting the Bus  
1
2
Carry out steps 1 and 2 in the previous item, “Setting  
the Bus Toggle On or Off.”  
Press [Fader Curve].  
A popup window appears.  
Press [Stroke Mode].  
3
Select the fader lever operation mode.  
A popup window appears.  
Normal: The transition progress is linear, according to  
the fader lever position.  
Advanced Tally Mode: When the fader lever is  
moved from the end of its travel, the tally is output  
slightly before the transition starts.  
3
4
Select whether to carry out a transition in one stroke or  
two strokes.  
2 Stroke: Carry out a preset color mix with two  
transition operations.  
1 Stroke: Carry out a preset color mix with a single  
transition operation.  
Macro Execution Mode Settings  
(Macro Menu)  
Note  
When the bus toggle mode is off (bus fixed mode), a  
preset color mix is always in “one-stroke mode.”  
Use the Macro menu to select the macro execution mode.  
For more information about macros, see “Macros” (page  
If each time a transition ends the transition type is to  
return to the previous setting, press [One Time],  
turning it to Enable.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Operation  
>Macro.  
Other Settings  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The Macro menu appears.  
Setting switcher GPI inputs  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >SWR  
GPI In.  
The SWR GPI Input menu appears. The status area  
shows the GPI input ports, and the trigger type and  
action set for the signal to be input to each port.  
2
3
Press [Exec Mode].  
A popup window appears.  
Select the macro execution mode.  
Normal: Execution of the next event starts  
automatically when a macro event finishes  
executing.  
Step: Execution pauses when a macro event finishes  
executing.  
2
Select the port for which you want to make the setting.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knobs. (E.g.: if the setting by knob 1 is  
value 5 and the setting by knob 2 is value 1, this is  
shown as 5-1.)  
GPI Input/Output Setup (GPI Menu)  
Use the GPI menu to set up GPI signal inputs and outputs  
between the switcher, control panel or DCU (MKS-8700/  
2700) and external devices.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
1 (Port)  
2 (No)  
GPI input port number selection 1 to 8  
To enable GPI input to the switcher or control  
panel  
You need to enable GPI input before you can use GPI input  
signals. Do this in the Enable/Safe Title menu.  
Number selection to which action 1 to 8  
is to be assigned  
To change the trigger type setting  
Press [Trigger Type], to display a popup window, and  
select the trigger type.  
1
From the top menu, select Misc >Enable/Safe Title.  
The Enable/Safe Title menu appears.  
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling edge  
pulse.  
of an input  
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge  
pulse.  
of an input  
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and  
rising edges  
of an input pulse.  
Disable (disabled): Input pulses are ignored.  
To change the action setting  
Press [Action], to display a popup window, and select the  
action.  
Action button  
M/E Auto Trans  
M/E Cut  
Status area display  
M/E AT  
2
Press the button for the type of GPI input to enable.  
M/E Cut  
To enable GPI input to the control panel: Press  
[Panel GPI], setting it to [Enable].  
a)  
P/P AT  
P/P Auto Trans  
To enable GPI input to the switcher: Press [SWR  
GPI], setting it to [Enable].  
a)  
P/P Cut  
P/P Cut  
M/E Key1 Auto Trans M/E K1 AT  
176  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Action button  
Status area display  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
M/E Key1 Cut  
M/E K1 Cut  
a)  
M/E Key2 Auto Trans M/E K2 AT  
1 (Port)  
GPI output port number  
selection  
1 to 16  
M/E Key2 Cut  
DSK1 Auto Trans  
DSK1 Cut  
M/E K2 Cut  
DSK1 AT  
DSK1 Cut  
DSK2 AT  
DSK2 Cut  
FTB AT  
a) Select 1 to 8 for GPI ports (G-1 to G-8), and 9 to 16 for tally ports  
(T1 to T8).  
To change the trigger type setting  
Press [Trigger Type], to display a popup window, and  
select the trigger type.  
DSK2 Auto Trans  
DSK2 Cut  
FTB Auto Trans  
FTB Cut  
(falling edge): The trigger closes the relay contacts  
or causes a low output level, and this state is  
maintained for the specified pulse width.  
(rising edge): The trigger opens the relay contacts or  
causes a high output level, and this state is maintained  
for the specified pulse width.  
FTB Cut  
b)  
Snapshot  
Snapshot Recall ?  
No Action  
No Action  
FM V Field  
FM V Field Freeze  
(both edges): Each time the trigger is activated, the  
relay switches between open/closed or the output level  
switches between high/low.  
FM V Frame  
FM V Off  
FM V Frame Freeze  
FM V Freeze Off  
Status: Depending on the state, the relay is switched open/  
closed or the output level is switched high/low.  
Disable (disabled): No output.  
FM K Field  
FM K Frame  
FM K Off  
FM K Field Freeze  
FM K Frame Freeze  
FM K Freeze Off  
To change the timing setting  
When the trigger type is other than [Status] or [Disable],  
press [Timing] to display a popup window, and select the  
timing.  
a) 1.5 M/E panel only  
b) When [Snapshot Recall ?] is selected, press [Register No] to set a register  
number (1 to 99).  
Any: Output on the earliest field that can be processed.  
Field 1: Output on field 1.  
Field 2: Output on field 2.  
Setting switcher GPI outputs  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >SWR  
GPI Out.  
Note  
When the following signal formats are selected, it is not  
possible to set the timing.  
• 1080PsF/23.976  
• 1080PsF/24  
• 1080PsF/25  
The SWR GPI Output menu appears. The status area  
shows the GPI output ports, and the trigger type,  
output timing, pulse width, and action set for the signal  
to be output from each port.  
• 1080PsF/29.97  
• 720p/59.94  
To change the pulse width setting  
When the trigger type is  
(falling edge) or  
(rising edge), turn the knobs to set the pulse width.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Pulse Width)  
Pulse width  
1 to 60 (fields)  
To change the action setting  
Press [Action] to display a popup window, and select the  
action.  
2
Select the port for which you want to make the setting.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Action button  
M/E Auto Trans  
M/E Cut  
Status area display  
M/E AT  
M/E Cut  
• Turn the knob.  
a)  
P/P AT  
P/P Auto Trans  
Other Settings  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Panel GPI Input menu appears. The status area  
shows the GPI input ports, and the trigger type and  
action set for the signal to be input to each port.  
Action button  
Status area display  
a)  
P/P Cut  
P/P Cut  
M/E Key1 Auto Trans M/E K1 AT  
M/E Key1 Cut M/E K1 Cut  
M/E Key2 Auto Trans M/E K2 AT  
M/E Key2 Cut  
DSK1 Auto Trans  
DSK1 Cut  
M/E K2 Cut  
DSK1 AT  
DSK1 Cut  
DSK2 AT  
DSK2 Cut  
FTB AT  
FTB Cut  
M/E K1 On  
M/E K2 On  
DSK1 On  
DSK2 On  
Error  
DSK2 Auto Trans  
DSK2 Cut  
FTB Auto Trans  
FTB Cut  
M/E Key1 On  
M/E Key2 On  
DSK1 On  
2
Select the port for which you want to make the setting.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
DSK2 On  
• Turn the knob.  
Error  
Tally Input1  
Tally Input2  
Tally Input3  
Tally Input4  
Tally Input5  
Tally Input6  
Tally Input7  
Tally Input8  
Tally Input9  
Tally Input10  
Tally Input11  
Tally Input12  
Tally Input13  
Tally Input14  
Tally Input15  
Tally Input16  
Tally M/E  
Tally 1  
Knob  
Description  
Setting  
values  
Tally 2  
1 (Port) GPI input port number selection 1 to 8  
Tally 3  
Tally 4  
To change the trigger type setting  
Press [Trigger Type], to display a popup window, and  
select the trigger type.  
Tally 5  
Tally 6  
Tally 7  
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling edge  
of an input pulse.  
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge  
of an input pulse.  
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and  
Tally 8  
Tally 9  
Tally 10  
Tally 11  
Tally 12  
Tally 13  
Tally 14  
Tally 15  
Tally 16  
Tally M/E  
No Action  
rising edges of an input pulse.  
Level: Trigger is applied when input is low level or high  
level.  
Disable (disabled): Input pulses are ignored.  
To change the action setting  
When the trigger type is other than [Level] and [Disable],  
press [Action] to display a popup window, then you can  
select the following actions.  
No Action  
Note  
a) 1.5 M/E panel only  
If you change the trigger type setting from any of falling  
edge, rising edge, and both edges to [Level], or vice versa,  
the action is automatically changed to [No Action].  
To test fire the trigger output  
Select the output port, and press [Test Fire].  
Note  
For details of the action when the trigger type is set to  
[Level], see the next item, “Setting the action when the  
trigger type is [Level].”  
When the selected output port trigger type is [Status], no  
trigger is output.  
Setting control panel GPI inputs  
Action button  
M/E Auto Trans  
M/E Cut  
Status area display  
M/E AT  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >Panel  
GPI In.  
M/E Cut  
178  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• 1080i/50  
• 1080i/59.94  
• 1080PsF/23.976  
• 1080PsF/24  
Action button  
Status area display  
a)  
P/P AT  
P/P Auto Trans  
a)  
P/P Cut  
P/P Cut  
• 1080PsF/25  
• 1080PsF/29.97  
• No Action  
M/E Key1 Auto Trans M/E K1 AT  
M/E Key1 Cut M/E K1 Cut  
M/E Key2 Auto Trans M/E K2 AT  
When [Screen Aspect] is selected: In the popup window,  
press the following action buttons, to select the action  
when the input goes to the high level/low level.  
• 4:3  
• 16:9  
M/E Key2 Cut  
DSK1 Auto Trans  
DSK1 Cut  
M/E K2 Cut  
DSK1 AT  
DSK1 Cut  
DSK2 AT  
DSK2 Cut  
FTB AT  
DSK2 Auto Trans  
DSK2 Cut  
• No Action  
When [Level Enable] is selected: In the popup window,  
press the following buttons, to select the action when  
the input goes to the high level/low level.  
• Enable  
• Disable  
• No Action  
FTB Auto Trans  
FTB Cut  
FTB Cut  
b)  
SnapShot  
Snapshot Recall ?  
No Action  
No Action  
FM V Field  
FM V Field Freeze  
Note  
FM V Frame  
FM V Off  
FM V Frame Freeze  
FM V Freeze Off  
FM K Field Freeze  
FM K Frame Freeze  
FM K Freeze Off  
Macro Take  
When using [Signal Format] and [Screen Aspect], set the  
[Level Enable] GPI input to [Enable]. If this is not set to  
[Enable], the GPI inputs are not valid.  
FM K Field  
FM K Frame  
FM K Off  
GPI outputs of the control panel  
The GPI outputs of the control panel are fixed as follows,  
so you need not make settings for them.  
Macro  
Port number  
GPI-1  
Action  
a) 1.5 M/E panel only  
b) When [Snapshot Recall ?] is selected, press [Register No] to set a register  
number (1 to 99).  
Error Status  
GPI-2  
No Action  
Setting the action when the trigger type is [Level]  
When the trigger type is [Level], press [Action] to display  
a popup window, then you can select the following four  
actions.  
GPI-3  
No Action  
GPI-4  
No Action  
GPI-5  
M/E Key1 On Status  
M/E Key2 On Status  
DSK1 On Status  
DSK2 On Status  
GPI-6  
Action button  
No Action  
Status area display  
No Action  
Format  
GPI-7  
GPI-8  
Signal Format  
Screen Aspect  
Level Enable  
Aspect  
Assigning GPI inputs to DCU parallel input  
ports  
Enable  
When other than [No Action] is selected, you can set the  
action separately for when the input is high level and when  
the input is low level. To set the action when the input is  
high level, press [High Level], and to set the action when  
the input is low level, press [Low Level], to display a  
popup window.  
You can assign GPI inputs to DCU parallel input ports  
which are not being used for tally external box input and  
tally enable input.  
more information about tally external box input and tally  
enable input.  
When [Signal Format] is selected: In the popup window,  
press any of the following action buttons, to select the  
action when the input goes to the high level/low level.  
• 576i/50  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU In  
Config.  
The DCU Input Config menu appears.  
• 480i/59.94  
• 720P/59.94  
Other Settings  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The status area shows a list of DCU input ports with  
their current signal assignments.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the GPI  
input to set.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select an input  
port for the assignment. You can choose either a port  
with no current assignment (No Assign), or a port with  
an assignment. Then select the GPI input to assign.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (GPI)  
GPI input number  
selection  
1 to 50  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
To change trigger type settings  
Press [Trigger Type] to display a popup window, then  
select the trigger type.  
a)  
1 (Port)  
DCU input port number  
selection  
1 to 102  
2 (GPI)  
GPI input number  
selection  
1 to 50  
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling  
edge of an input pulse.  
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge  
of an input pulse.  
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and  
rising edges of an input pulse.  
a) For the MKS-2700, set in the range 1 to 34.  
3
Press [GPI Set].  
To clear GPI input assignments  
Level: Trigger is applied when the input changes to low or  
high.  
Select an input port, as in step 2 of the above procedure,  
then press [Clear].  
Disable (disabled): Ignore input pulses.  
Setting DCU GPI inputs  
To change action settings  
When the trigger type is other than [Level] or [Disable],  
you can press [Action] to display a popup window and  
select from the actions in the following table.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU  
GPI In.  
The DCU GPI Input menu appears.  
The status area shows the GPI input ports and the  
trigger type and action settings of the signals input to  
each port.  
Note  
If you change the trigger type setting from any of falling  
edge, rising edge, and both edges to [Level], or vice versa,  
the action is automatically changed to [No Action].  
For details of the action when the trigger type is set to  
Operating button  
M/E Auto Trans  
M/E Cut  
Status area display  
M/E AT  
M/E Cut  
a)  
P/P AT  
P/P Auto Trans  
180  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating button  
Status area display  
a)  
P/P Cut  
P/P Cut  
M/E Key1 Auto Trans  
M/E Key1 Cut  
M/E Key2 Auto Trans  
M/E Key2 Cut  
DSK1 Auto Trans  
DSK1 Cut  
M/E K1 AT  
M/E K1 Cut  
M/E K2 AT  
M/E K2 Cut  
DSK1 AT  
DSK1 Cut  
DSK2 AT  
DSK2 Cut  
FTB AT  
DSK2 Auto Trans  
DSK2 Cut  
2
Using any of the following methods, select an output  
port for the assignment. You can choose either a port  
with no current assignment (No Assign), or a port with  
an assignment. Then select the GPI output to assign.  
FTB Auto Trans  
FTB Cut  
FTB Cut  
b)  
Snapshot  
Snapshot Recall ?  
No Action  
No Action  
FM V Field  
FM V Frame  
FM V Off  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
FM V Field Freeze  
FM V Frame Freeze  
FM V Freeze Off  
FM K Field Freeze  
FM K Frame Freeze  
FM K Freeze Off  
Macro Take  
• Turn the knobs.  
FM K Field  
FM K Frame  
FM K Off  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Port)  
DCU output port  
selection  
1 and upwards  
2 (GPI)  
GPI output number  
selection  
1 to 50  
Macro  
c)  
AUX O_Ride  
AUX Bus Override  
a) Output port numbers are sequential numbers with respect to number  
pairs, the pairs consisting of a slot number (2 to 6) and a port number  
(1 to 54).  
a) 1.5 M/E panel only  
b) When you select [Snapshot Recall ?], press [Register No] to select the  
register number (1 to 99).  
c) [AUX Bus Override] appears only when the trigger type is “falling edge”  
or “rising edge”. If you select this action, press [Aux No] and [Input No]  
to select the AUX bus number (1 to 4) and the input source number (1 to  
16).  
MKS-2700: Uses slot 2 only. Settings can be made in the range 1 to  
36.  
MKS-8700: The setting range varies depending on the number of  
slots used.  
3
Press [GPI Set].  
Assigning GPI outputs to DCU parallel  
output ports  
You can assign GPI outputs to DCU parallel output ports  
which are not being used for parallel tally output.  
To clear GPI output assignments  
Select an output port, as explained in step 2 of the previous  
procedure, then press [Clear].  
Setting DCU GPI outputs  
more information about parallel tally output.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU  
GPI Out.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >GPI >DCU  
Out Config.  
The DCU GPI Output menu appears.  
The status area shows the trigger type, output timing,  
pulse width, and action settings of each GPI output  
signal.  
The DCU Output Config menu appears.  
The status area shows the signals assigned to DCU  
output ports.  
Other Settings  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change pulse widths  
When the trigger type is other than [Status] or [Disable],  
turn knob 2 to set the pulse width.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
2 (Pulse Width) Pulse width  
1 to 60 (fields)  
To change action settings  
When the trigger type is [Status], you can press [Action] to  
display a popup window and select from the actions shown  
in the following table.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the GPI  
output to set.  
Operating button  
M/E Key1 On  
M/E Key2 On  
DSK1 On  
Status area display  
M/E K1 On  
M/E K2 On  
DSK1 On  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
DSK2 On  
DSK2 On  
• Turn the knob.  
Error  
Error  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
No Action  
No Action  
1 (GPI)  
GPI output number  
selection  
1 to 50  
a)  
Editor GPI  
Editor GPI ?  
a) When [Editor GPI ?] is selected, press [GPI No] and select an Editor GPI  
number (1 to 32).  
To change trigger type settings  
Press [Trigger Type] to display a popup window, then  
select the trigger type.  
When the trigger type is other than [Status], the only  
possible selections are [No Action] and [Editor GPI ?].  
(falling edge): Trigger is applied on the falling  
edge of an input pulse.  
Note  
(rising edge): Trigger is applied on the rising edge  
of an input pulse.  
[Editor GPI ?] can be used only when you have a valid  
license for the BZS-8050 Editing Control Software.  
(both edges): Trigger is applied on both falling and  
rising edges of an input pulse.  
Status: Trigger is applied when the relay status changes to  
open or closed, or when the level changes to low or  
high.  
Tally Setup (System Tally Menu)  
For details of the setup for tally signals to be output from  
the switcher to external devices, see “Setting switcher GPI  
outputs” in the section “GPI Input/Output Setup (GPI  
Disable (disabled): Input pulses are ignored.  
To change output timings  
When the trigger type is other than [Status] or [Disable],  
you can press [Timing] to display a popup window and  
select from the following timings.  
Any: Output on the earliest field that can be processed.  
Field 1: Output on field 1.  
Use the System Tally menu to make settings related to  
system tally.  
Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to  
the S-Bus space  
Field 2: Output on field 2.  
The MFS-2000 system uses the S-Bus protocol as its  
interface to routers (routing switchers). Therefore it is  
necessary to assign inputs and outputs of the switcher  
and so on to an S-Bus space.  
Note  
You cannot set the timing when any of the following signal  
formats are selected.  
• 1080PsF/23.976  
• 1080PsF/24  
• 1080PsF/25  
• 1080PsF/29.97  
• 720P/59.94  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>S-Bus Assign.  
The S-Bus Assign menu appears. The status area  
shows the matrix size, source addresses, destination  
addresses, and levels.  
182  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
3
Press [Matrix Size].  
Note  
The switcher (SWR) is displayed, but cannot be set  
here. To make switcher settings, use the S-Bus Assign  
menu.  
A popup window appears.  
Select the matrix size.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the  
external box to set.  
Standard 136 × 138: Assign the switcher S-Bus space  
at full size. You can assign all switcher inputs and  
outputs to the S-Bus space, but this causes some  
waste of S-Bus space.  
Compact 128 × 128: Assign the switcher S-Bus space  
at compact size. It is not possible to assign all  
switcher inputs and outputs to the S-Bus space, but  
the S-Bus space can be used efficiently.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Ext Box No) External box selection 1 to 4  
4
5
Press [S-Bus Assign].  
3
4
Press [Matrix Size].  
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.  
A popup window appears.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Select the matrix size  
a)  
1 (Source)  
Source start address  
1 to 889  
b)  
No Assign: Do not use.  
1 to 897  
8 × 1: Select an external box with 8 inputs and 1  
a)  
2 (Destination) Destination start  
address  
1 to 887  
1 to 897  
output.  
b)  
16 × 1: Select an external box with 16 inputs and 1  
3 (Level)  
Level in S-Bus space 1 to 8  
output.  
32 × 1: Select an external box with 32 inputs and 1  
a) When matrix size is Standard 136 × 138  
b) When matrix size is Compact 128 × 128  
output.  
5
6
Press [S-Bus Assign].  
Making external box settings  
If you need to acquire the signal selection status of external  
devices via parallel input, assign a matrix to S-Bus space  
as an external selector (external box).  
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>External Box.  
2 (Source)  
Source start address  
1 to 1017  
1 to 1009  
1 to 993  
b)  
c)  
The External Box menu appears. The status area  
shows a list of device names, matrix sizes, source  
addresses, destination addresses, and levels. “No  
Assign” appears in the [Matrix Size] column of unused  
external boxes.  
3 (Destination) Destination start  
address  
1 to 1024  
4 (Level)  
Level in S-Bus space 1 to 8  
a) When matrix size is 8 × 1  
b) When matrix size is 16 × 1  
c) When matrix size is 32 × 1  
Other Settings  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To couple external boxes  
4 Groups Connect: Group the data areas of Group 1  
to 4 (or Group 5 to 8) and transfer as the tally  
information of Group 1 (or Group 5).  
2 Groups Connect: Group data areas in pairs Group  
1/2 and Group 3/4 (or Group 5/6 and Group 7/8)  
and transfer as the tally information of Group 1 (or  
Group 5) and Group 3 (or Group 7).  
For the external boxes that you want to connect, set the  
same destinations and levels in step 6.  
By coupling a number of external boxes, you can increase  
the number of inputs.  
Example:  
External box 1: set to 8 × 1 size  
External box 2: set to 32 × 1 size  
By coupling these two external boxes, you obtain 40  
inputs (=8+32).  
Making tally generation settings  
Use the following procedures to make tally generation  
settings by setting destination, tally type, and input port  
parameters, and to modify existing settings.  
Making tally group settings  
With the S-Bus protocol, tally control is possible for  
groups 1 to 8, but in this system you can use either groups  
1 to 4 or groups 5 to 8. You can select whether or not to  
transfer tally information over the S-Bus, and select the  
type of grouping.  
To make new tally generation settings  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>Tally Enable.  
The Tally Enable appears. The status area shows tally  
setting information.  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>Group Tally.  
The Group Tally menu appears.  
2
Press [New], turning it on, and turn the knobs to set the  
following parameters.  
2
3
Press [Tally Group].  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
A popup window appears.  
2 (Dest Add)  
Source/destination 1 to 1024  
address  
Select the groups to use.  
3 (Dest Lvl)  
Destination level  
Tally type  
1 to 8  
Group 1-4: Use groups 1 to 4.  
Group 5-8: Use groups 5 to 8.  
a)  
4 (Tally Type)  
1 (R1) to 8(G4)  
a) The tally type display changes according to the tally group in use (R  
is red tally, and G is green tally).  
4
Press [S-Bus Tally] to select whether or not to transfer  
tally information over the S-Bus.  
Tally group  
Tally type  
Group 1-4  
1: R1, 2: G1, 3: R2, 4: G2, 5: R3, 6:  
G3, 7: R4, 8: G4  
Each press toggles between On (transfer) and Off (do  
not transfer).  
Group 5-8  
1: R5, 2: G5, 3: R6, 4: G6, 5: R7, 6:  
G7, 7: R8, 8: G8  
5
6
Press [Tally Gp Sel].  
3
4
Press [Tally Enable].  
A popup window appears.  
A popup window appears.  
Select the type of grouping.  
Set the tally generation conditions.  
Separate: Do not group. Transfer tally information  
separately for each of the eight tallies.  
Tally Input: Generate a tally when a tally input port is  
active.  
184  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enable: Always generate a tally.  
Disable: Never generate a tally.  
5
6
If you selected Tally Input in step 4, turn knob 5 to  
select the tally input port.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
5 (Input No) Tally input port number  
1 to 102  
a) For the MKS-2700, set in the range 1 to 34.  
Press [Set].  
2
Using any of the following methods, select a tally  
output port.  
To modify existing tally settings  
1
2
If [New] is on, turn it off.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Using any of the following methods, select the tally  
settings to modify.  
• Turn the knobs.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Slot)  
Slot number selection  
2 to 6  
b)  
• Turn the knob.  
2 (Port)  
Port number selection  
1 to 54  
a) For the MKS-2700, set to 2.  
b) For the MKS-2700, set in the range 1 to 34.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (No)  
Tally selection  
1 and upwards  
3
4
Press [Src/Dest].  
3
4
With reference to steps 2 to 5 in the preceding section  
“Making new tally generation settings,” change the  
parameters as required.  
A popup window appears.  
Select whether to assign a source or a destination to the  
port.  
Press [Set].  
To delete tally generation settings  
Select tally settings by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of the  
then press [Delete].  
Source: Assign a source.  
Dest: Assign a destination.  
5
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.  
Making parallel tally settings  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Proceed as follows to set the source and destination  
addresses, level, and tally type for each parallel port.  
3 (Address)  
Source or  
destination address  
1 to 1024  
a)  
4 (Level)  
Destination level  
1 to 8  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>Parallel Tally.  
b)  
5 (Tally Type) Tally type  
1 (R1) to 8 (G4)  
a) The level setting is required only when destination was selected in  
step 4.  
b) The tally type display changes according to the tally group in use (R  
is red tally, and G is green tally).  
Parallel Tally menu appears. The status areas shows  
setting information for each port.  
Tally group Tally type  
Group 1-4  
1: R1, 2: G1, 3: R2, 4: G2, 5: R3, 6:  
G3, 7: R4, 8: G4  
Group 5-8  
1: R5, 2: G5, 3: R6, 4: G6, 5: R7, 6:  
G7, 7: R8, 8: G8  
6
Press [Set].  
Other Settings  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To delete parallel tally settings  
In step 2, select a tally port and press [Clear].  
3
4
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
Making wiring settings  
2 (Dest Add)  
3 (Dest Lvl)  
4 (Src Add)  
5 (Src Lvl)  
Destination address 1 to 1024  
When configuring a system in which the switcher inputs  
and outputs are connected to a router, it is necessary to set  
up this connection configuration (referred to as “wiring”)  
in the S-Bus space.  
Destination level  
Source address  
Source level  
1 to 8  
1 to 1024  
1 to 8  
Press [Set].  
To make new wiring settings  
To sort wiring settings  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
Wiring.  
1
2
Select a wiring setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of  
“To modify wiring settings,” then press [Sort].  
The Wiring menu appears. The status areas shows  
wiring information.  
A popup window appears.  
Execute the sort by selecting one of the following sort  
orders.  
Dest: Destination level/address  
The wiring settings are sorted as follows.  
Ascending order (smallest first) by destination  
level t ascending order by destination address  
t ascending order by source level t ascending  
order by source address.  
Source: Source level/address  
The wiring settings are sorted as follows.  
Ascending order (smallest first) by source level  
t ascending order by source address t  
Ascending order by destination level t  
ascending order by destination address.  
2
3
Press [New], turning it on, and turn the knobs to set the  
following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
To delete wiring settings  
Select a wiring setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of “To  
modify wiring settings,” then press [Delete].  
1 (Dest From) Destination start  
address  
1 to 1024  
2 (Dest To)  
Destination end  
address  
1 to 1024  
Copying tallies  
You can copy tally source information to another tally  
source.  
3 (Dest Lvl)  
4 (Src From)  
5 (Src Lvl)  
Destination level  
1 to 8  
Source start address 1 to 1024  
Source level 1 to 8  
To make new tally copy settings  
Press [Set].  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>Tally Copy.  
To modify wiring settings  
1
2
If [New] is on, turn it off.  
The Tally Copy menu appears. The status area shows  
the current tally copy settings.  
Using any of the following methods, select the wiring  
setting to modify.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (No)  
Wiring number selection 1 and upwards  
186  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Select one of the following to execute the sort.  
From Source: Sort in ascending order (smallest first)  
by From Source name.  
To Source: Sort in ascending order by To Source  
name.  
To delete tally copy settings  
Select a copy setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of “To  
modify tally copy settings,” then press [Delete].  
External Device Connection Port  
Setup (Device Menu)  
2
3
Press [New], turning it on, then turn the knobs to set  
the following parameters.  
To control external devices connected to the RS-422A 9-  
pin serial ports of the DCU, use the Device menu to make  
port settings.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (CP FR (FR)) Copy-from source  
start address  
1 to 1024  
information about controlling external devices.  
2 (CP FR (To)) Copy-from source  
end address  
1 to 1024  
3 (CP To (FR)) Copy-to source start 1 to 1024  
address  
Assigning devices to DCU ports  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >Device >Port  
Assign.  
Press [Set].  
A new tally copy setting based on the settings made in  
The Port Assign menu appears. The status area shows  
a list of devices currently assigned to ports, together  
with information about how they are controlled.  
step 2 is added.  
To modify tally copy settings  
1
2
If [New] is on, turn it off.  
Device control settings are made in the Device Assign  
menu. For details, see page 188.  
Using any of the following methods, select the setting  
to change.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (No)  
Copy setting selection  
1 and upwards  
3
4
Turn the knobs to set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 to 1024  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the target  
port for a device assignment.  
2 (CP From)  
3 (CP To)  
Copy-from source  
Copy-to source  
1 to 1024  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Press [Set].  
To sort tally copy settings  
• Turn the knob.  
1
Select a copy setting by carrying out steps 1 and 2 of  
“To modify tally copy settings,” then press [Sort].  
A popup window appears.  
Other Settings  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
By default, ports have names in the format “PORT S-  
P.”  
S: A slot number (2 to 6)  
P: A port number (1 to 6)  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
1 (Port)  
Port selection  
1 and upwards  
a) Output port numbers are sequential numbers with respect to number  
pairs, the pairs consisting of a slot number (2 to 6) and a port number  
(1 to 54).  
Making control settings for devices  
assigned to ports  
Make the following settings  
• Assignments of devices assigned to the various ports to  
the device selection buttons (Device1 to Device6)  
• Selection of whether or not to operate from an editing  
keyboard  
MKS-2700: Uses slot 2 only. Settings can be made in the range 1 to  
36.  
MKS-8700: The setting range varies depending on the number of  
slots used.  
3
4
Press [Dev Type].  
A popup window opens.  
• For disc recorders and Extended VTRs, selection of  
devices to share file lists with  
Select the type of device to assign.  
VTR: VTR  
1
From the top menu, select Setup/Diag >System Tally  
>Device Assign.  
DDR SD9P: Disk recorder (Sony Disk 9-pin Protocol)  
DDR VDCP: Disk recorder (Video Disk  
Communications Protocol)  
Extended VTR: Extended VTR  
Mixer: Audio mixer  
The Device Assign menu appears. The status areas  
shows the devices assigned to the various ports,  
together with information about how the devices are  
controlled.  
No Assign: No assignment  
5
Press [Port Setting] to make the detailed settings  
required to control the specific device you plan to  
connect.  
See the following sections for more information about  
how to make detailed settings for the various device  
types.  
• “To make detailed settings for VTRs” (page 189)  
• “Making detailed settings for disk recorders (Sony  
Disk 9-pin Protocol)” (page 190)  
• “Making detailed settings for disk recorders (Video  
Disk Communications Protocol)” (page 190)  
• “Making detailed settings for Extended VTRs”  
2
Using any of the following methods, select a target  
port.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
Note  
Audio mixers cannot be operated from this system. If  
you have a valid BZS-8050 license, operation from an  
editing keyboard is possible.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
To rename a port  
You can rename ports by assigning names of up to 8  
characters.  
a)  
1 (Port)  
Port number selection  
1 and upwards  
a) Output port numbers are sequential numbers with respect to number  
pairs, the pairs consisting of a slot number (2 to 6) and a port number  
(1 to 54).  
1
2
Select a port by carrying out step 2 of “Assigning  
devices to ports.”  
MKS-2700: Uses slot 2 only. Settings can be made in the range 1 to  
36.  
MKS-8700: The setting range varies depending on the number of  
slots used.  
Press [Rename].  
3
4
Press [Assign].  
The keyboard window appears.  
A popup window appears.  
3
Enter a name and press [Enter].  
Select a device selection button, which will select the  
device on the selected port.  
To return to the default name, press [Default Name].  
188  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DEV1 to DEV6: [Device1] to [Device6] buttons  
No Assign: Do not assign a device selection button  
5
Press [Plug In Editor], and select whether or not to  
enable operation of the selected device from an editing  
keyboard.  
Notes  
• A valid BZS-8050 license is required for operation from  
an editing keyboard.  
• When the device on the selected port is an audio mixer,  
[Enable] is selected automatically. This setting cannot be  
changed.  
VTR detailed settings screen  
1
Using any of the following methods, select a VTR  
constant byte to set.  
To share file lists  
1
2
Select a port as in step 2, then press [File List].  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
A popup window appears.  
• Turn the knob.  
Select the devices with which the device on the  
selected port will share file lists.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
3 (No)  
VTR constant selection 1 to 16  
Note  
Select devices of the same type for file list sharing.  
2
3
Press [VTR Cnst Set].  
The hexadecimal keypad window (see page 35)  
appears.  
Making detailed settings for devices  
assigned to DCU ports  
After selecting a device type for a DCU port, you need to  
make detailed settings to enable control of the external  
device that you plan to connect to that port.  
Use the Port Setting menu to make detailed settings for  
specific devices.  
To display the Port setting menu, select the device that you  
want to set in the status area of the Port Assign menu (see  
page 187) and press [Port Setting].  
You can also select a device in the Port Setting menu by  
turning knob 1.  
Enter a value and press [Enter].  
This sets one byte of the VTR constants.  
Return to step 1 and repeat as required.  
4
5
Press [TC Source].  
A popup window appears.  
Select the timecode source.  
LTC: Use LTC only.  
LTC:VITC: Switch automatically between LTC and  
VITC.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
1 (Port)  
Port selection  
1 and upwards  
CTL: Use CTL pulses or timer counter pulses. Select  
this only for tapes on which no timecode is  
recorded.  
To return from the Port Setting to the Port Assign menu,  
press [Port Assign] in the Port Setting menu.  
VTR constant settings  
Set VTR constant values in the range from 00 to FF for the  
following items.  
Making detailed settings for VTRs  
The following settings are required for VTRs.  
• The VTR constants of your VTR  
• Selection of the timecode source (signal used to derive  
timecode for determining tape position)  
The status area of the Port Setting menu for VTR devices  
shows information about the selected port and a list of the  
bytes in the VTR constants.  
Other Settings  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3:Play After Cueup Delay (delay time from the cued-up state to  
begin playback)  
4:Play After Open Next Delay (delay time from the Open Next state  
to begin playback)  
Block  
Byte  
Setting  
Block1  
1
2
3
HI-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)  
LO-BYTE (DEVICE TYPE)  
2
3
Turn knob 4 to set the response time.  
HI-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL  
TIME)  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
4
LO-BYTE (FRAME) (PREROLL  
TIME)  
4 (Setting) Response time  
0 to 255  
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EDIT DELAY (FRAME)  
EE DELAY (FRAME)  
OVER RUN (FRAME)  
TRAJECTORY  
Press [Set].  
The setting is confirmed.  
Making detailed settings for disk recorders  
(Video Disk Communications Protocol)  
The following settings are required for disk recorders  
using the Video Disk Communications Protocol (called  
“DDR VDCP” below).  
• Selection of whether to use the disk recorder as a  
recorder or as a player  
• Video port number  
Block2  
TC READ DELAY (FRAME)  
START DELAY (FRAME)  
AFTER SYNC DELAY –  
AFTER SYNC DELAY +  
MODE1  
MODE2  
• Response times until command execution  
MAX PRRL SPEED  
QUICK PVW PRRL TIME (FRAME)  
The status area of the Port Setting menu for DDR VDCP  
devices shows information about the selected port, a video  
port, and a list of response times.  
Making detailed settings for disk recorders (Sony  
Disk 9-pin Protocol)  
For disk recorders using the Sony Disk 9-pin Protocol  
(called “DDR SD9P” below), settings are required to  
specify response times until command execution.  
The status area of the Port Setting menu for DDR SD9P  
devices shows information about the selected port and a  
list of response times.  
DDR VDCP detailed settings screen  
1
2
Press [DDR Type].  
A popup window opens.  
Select Player or Recorder.  
DDR SD9P detailed settings screen  
Player: Functions as player.  
Recorder: Functions as recorder.  
1
Using any of the following methods, select a response  
time to set.  
3
Using any of the following methods, select the video  
port or a response time to set.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
• Turn the knob.  
a)  
3 (No)  
Setting item selection  
1 to 4  
a) 1:Maximum Open Delay (maximum time required to open a file)  
2:Maximum Cueup Delay (maximum time required to cue up a file)  
190  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2
3
Turn the knob to set the response time.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
3 (No)  
Setting item selection  
1 to 5  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a) 1:Video Port (port associated with the serial port being set. The  
output port of a player, and the input port of a recorder.)  
4 (Setting) Response time  
0 to 255  
2:Maximum Open Delay (maximum time required to open a file)  
3:Maximum Cueup Delay (maximum time required to cue up a file)  
Press [Set].  
4:Play After Cueup Delay (delay time from the cued-up state to  
begin playback)  
The setting is confirmed.  
5:Stop Delay (delay time from Stop command to actual stop)  
4
5
Turn knob 4 to set the video port or the response time.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
4 (Setting) Video port number  
setting  
0 to 127  
Response time  
0 to 255  
a) 0: No assignment  
Press [Set].  
The setting is confirmed.  
Making detailed settings for Extended VTRs  
For Extended VTRs, settings are required to specify  
response times until command execution.  
The status area of the Port Setting menu for Extended VTR  
devices shows information about the selected port and a  
list of response times.  
Extended VTR detailed settings screen  
1
Using any of the following methods, select a response  
time to set.  
• Press directry on the list in the status area.  
• Use the arrow buttons to scroll the reverse video  
cursor.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Description  
Setting values  
a)  
3 (No)  
Setting item selection  
1 to 4  
a) 1:Maximum Open Delay (maximum time required to open a file)  
2:Maximum Cueup Delay (maximum time required to cue up a file)  
3:Play After Cueup Delay (delay time from the cued-up state to  
begin playback)  
4:Stop Delay (delay time from Stop command to actual stop)  
Other Settings  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
192  
Other Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Border  
Index  
A
Advanced Operations  
Color Corrector Board (MKS-2420M)  
Control Panel  
Copying or swapping color corrector  
Creating a pair from a video signal and  
Cropping  
Auto transition  
C
Channel  
AUX Bus Remote Panel (MKS-8080)  
AUX Bus Remote Panel (MKS-8082)  
Cross-point buttons  
B
Basic operations  
Clear button  
changing the position and size of  
using internally generated signals  
Close button  
D
video switching on the M/E bank  
video switching on the PGM/PST  
DEVICE/UTILITY operation buttons  
Index  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Frame Memory Board Set (MKS-  
Enter button  
Downstream key/fade to black control  
DSK independent transition execution  
External device connection port setup  
F
G
E
Edge  
GPI inputs setting  
File list (disk recorder/Extended VTR)  
Effect  
batch operating on data files of  
deleting the data of selected  
loading the data of selected  
GPI outputs  
H
selecting the background of a 2-  
selecting with the Flexi Pad  
operating on individual data files  
Effect direction  
saving the data of selected  
I
selecting with the Effect/Wipe  
Flow of operations  
Input/Output Connector Board (MKS-  
Effect pattern  
changing the position and size of  
Effect snapshot  
using internally generated signals  
J
194  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main menu  
K
Key  
N
Next transition  
Menu  
O
selecting by entering page  
selecting by navigating the menu  
selecting from the display history  
P
L
Pattern position and size  
PGM/PST cross-point control block  
Phase adjustments through mode  
M
Index  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transition  
Power Supply Unit (for control panels)  
Power Supply Unit (for MFS-2000)  
Transition execution section  
Transition rate  
System  
Transition rates  
setting with the Flexi Pad control  
Transition type selection buttons  
R
U
S
V
Selecting video  
Video switching  
T
W
Window (for chroma key adjustment)  
196  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X
Y
Index  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The material contained in this manual consists of information  
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely  
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this  
manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other  
than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described  
in this manual without the express written permission of Sony  
Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sony Corporation  
B & P Company  
MFS-2000  
(SY)  
Printed in Japan  
2005.02.13  
© 2004  
http://www.sony.net/  
Printed on 100% recycled paper  
3-855-579-02(1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp All in One Printer MFP Series User Manual
Sharp Microwave Oven R 1900M User Manual
Sharp Projector XG MB50X 2000 User Manual
Soleus Air Air Conditioner SG TTW 09ESE 26 User Manual
Sony Camcorder 3 286 590 121 User Manual
Sony CD Player CDX 4000X User Manual
Sony Microphone ECM PC60 User Manual
Sony Portable Speaker SS SRX7 User Manual
Stiga Lawn Mower 13 2502 17 User Manual
Summit Car Seat ENG 4358 3412E User Manual